US20230093483A1 - Glycotargeting therapeutics - Google Patents

Glycotargeting therapeutics Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20230093483A1
US20230093483A1 US17/810,565 US202217810565A US2023093483A1 US 20230093483 A1 US20230093483 A1 US 20230093483A1 US 202217810565 A US202217810565 A US 202217810565A US 2023093483 A1 US2023093483 A1 US 2023093483A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
formula
cmp
ova
seq
antigen
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
US17/810,565
Inventor
Jeffrey A. Hubbell
David Scott Wilson
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Ecole Polytechnique Federale de Lausanne EPFL
Original Assignee
Ecole Polytechnique Federale de Lausanne EPFL
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US14/627,297 external-priority patent/US10821157B2/en
Application filed by Ecole Polytechnique Federale de Lausanne EPFL filed Critical Ecole Polytechnique Federale de Lausanne EPFL
Priority to US17/810,565 priority Critical patent/US20230093483A1/en
Publication of US20230093483A1 publication Critical patent/US20230093483A1/en
Assigned to ÉCOLE POLYTECHNIQUE FÉDÉRALE DE LAUSANNE (EPFL) reassignment ÉCOLE POLYTECHNIQUE FÉDÉRALE DE LAUSANNE (EPFL) ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: HUBBELL, JEFFREY A., WILSON, David Scott
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/0005—Vertebrate antigens
    • A61K39/001—Preparations to induce tolerance to non-self, e.g. prior to transplantation
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/16—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/17—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • A61K38/22—Hormones
    • A61K38/28—Insulins
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/16—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/17—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • A61K38/38—Albumins
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/0002—Fungal antigens, e.g. Trichophyton, Aspergillus, Candida
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/0005—Vertebrate antigens
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/35—Allergens
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/385—Haptens or antigens, bound to carriers
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
    • A61K47/549—Sugars, nucleosides, nucleotides or nucleic acids
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
    • A61K47/555—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound pre-targeting systems involving an organic compound, other than a peptide, protein or antibody, for targeting specific cells
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K2039/555—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies characterised by a specific combination antigen/adjuvant
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K2039/57—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies characterised by the type of response, e.g. Th1, Th2
    • A61K2039/577—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies characterised by the type of response, e.g. Th1, Th2 tolerising response
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K2039/60—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies characteristics by the carrier linked to the antigen
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K2039/60—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies characteristics by the carrier linked to the antigen
    • A61K2039/6093—Synthetic polymers, e.g. polyethyleneglycol [PEG], Polymers or copolymers of (D) glutamate and (D) lysine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K2039/62—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies characterised by the link between antigen and carrier
    • A61K2039/627—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies characterised by the link between antigen and carrier characterised by the linker
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2319/00—Fusion polypeptide
    • C07K2319/01—Fusion polypeptide containing a localisation/targetting motif

Definitions

  • the field of the disclosure relates to pharmaceutically acceptable compositions that are useful in the treatment of transplant rejection, autoimmune disease, food allergy, and immune response against a therapeutic agent.
  • composition comprising a compound of Formula 1:
  • Z can also comprise galactose, galactosamine, N-acetylgalactosamine, glucose, glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine, for example, conjugated at its C1, C2 or C6 to Y.
  • Y can be Y is selected from N-hydroxysuccinamidyl linkers, malaemide linkers, vinylsulfone linkers, pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol) linkers, pyridyl di-thiol linkers, n-nitrophenyl carbonate linkers, NHS-ester linkers, and nitrophenoxy poly(ethylene glycol)ester linkers.
  • Y can also comprise: an antibody, antibody fragment, peptide or other ligand that specifically binds X; a disulfanyl ethyl ester; a structure represented by one of Formulae Ya to Yp:
  • the left bracket “(” indicates the bond between X and Y; the right or bottom bracket and “)” indicates the bond between Y and Z; n is an integer from about 1 to 100; p is an integer from about 2 to 150; q is an integer from about 1 to 44; R 8 is —CH 2 — or —CH 2 —CH 2 —C(CH 3 )(CN)—; R 9 is a direct bond or —CH 2 —CH 2 —NH—C(O)—; and Y′ represents the remaining portion of Y.
  • n is about 40 to 80
  • p is about 10 to 100
  • q is about 3 to 20
  • R 8 is —CH 2 —CH 2 —C(CH 3 )(CN)—
  • R 9 is —CH 2 —CH 2 —NH—C(O)—
  • Z is galactose or N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at its C1.
  • Y comprises Formula Ya, Formula Yb, Formula Yh, Formula Yi, Formula Yk, Formula Ym or Formula Yn, particularly Formula Ya, Formula Yb, Formula Ym or Formula Yn.
  • X can further comprise: a foreign transplant antigen against which transplant recipients develop an unwanted immune response; a foreign food, animal, plant or environmental antigen against which patients develop an unwanted immune response; a foreign therapeutic agent against which patients develop an unwanted immune response; or a synthetic self-antigen against the endogenous version of which patients develop an unwanted immune response, or a tolerogenic portion thereof.
  • the disclosure also pertains to a method of treatment for an unwanted immune response against an antigen by administering to a mammal in need of such treatment an effective amount of a composition comprising a compound of Formula 1 as discussed above.
  • the composition can be administered for clearance of a circulating protein or peptide or antibody that specifically binds to antigen moiety X, which circulating protein or peptide or antibody is causatively involved in transplant rejection, immune response against a therapeutic agent, autoimmune disease, hypersensitivity and/or allergy.
  • the composition can be administered in an amount effective to reduce a concentration of the antibodies that are causatively involved in transplant rejection, immune response against a therapeutic agent, autoimmune disease, hypersensitivity and/or allergy in blood of the patient by at least 50% w/w, as measured at a time between about 12 to about 48 hours after the administration.
  • the composition can administered for tolerization of a patient with respect to antigen moiety X.
  • FIGS. 1 A- 1 D are a series of graphs showing galactose conjugation.
  • FIG. 1 A depicts that F1aA-PE-m 4 -n 80 (Gal-PE) preferentially targets OVA to sinusoidal endothelial cells (LSECs) of the liver.
  • FIG. 1 B depicts that F1aA-PE-m 4 -n 80 (Gal-PE) preferentially targets OVA to Kupffer cells (KC) of the liver.
  • FIG. 1 C depicts that F1aA-PE-m 4 -n 80 (Gal-PE) preferentially targets OVA to hepatocytes.
  • FIG. 1 D depicts that F1aA-PE-m 4 -n 80 (Gal-PE) preferentially targets OVA to other antigen presenting cells (APCs) of the liver.
  • APCs antigen presenting cells
  • FIG. 2 is a graph showing proliferation of OTI CD8+ T cells in mice treated with F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 80 (Gal-OVA), OVA or saline (i.e. na ⁇ ve).
  • FIGS. 3 A- 3 B are a series of graphs depicting data related to marker expression on T cells.
  • FIG. 3 A shows the percentage of OT-1 CD8+ T cells presenting PD-1 in generations of proliferating T cells treated with saline, OVA or F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 80 (GAL-OVA).
  • FIG. 3 B show the percentage of OT-1 CD8+ T cells presenting Annexin-V in generations of proliferating T cells treated with saline, OVA or F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 80 (GAL-OVA).
  • FIG. 4 is a graph showing galactose conjugation [F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 80 (Gal-OVA)] decreases the immunogenicity of OVA as determined by OVA-specific antibody titers (shown in Ab titers log ⁇ 1 ).
  • FIG. 5 shows that F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 80 (Gal-OVA) is able to deplete OVA-specific antibodies from the serum.
  • FIGS. 6 A- 6 F depict data related to the migitation of the OVA-specific immune response.
  • FIG. 6 A shows the immune response in mice challenged with OVA and LPS.
  • FIG. 6 B shows the immune response in mice treated with OVA, while
  • FIG. 6 C shows the immune response in na ⁇ ve mice.
  • FIGS. 6 A- 6 F depict data related to the migitation of the OVA-specific immune response.
  • FIG. 6 A shows the immune response in mice challenged with OVA and LPS.
  • FIG. 6 B shows the immune response in mice treated with OVA
  • FIG. 6 C shows the immune response in na ⁇ ve mice.
  • FIGS. 6 A- 6 F depict data related to the migitation of the OVA-specific immune response.
  • 6 D, 6 E, and 6 F show that F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 80 (mGal-OVA; 6 D), F1b-OVA-m 1 -n 44 -p 34 (pGal-OVA; 6 E), and N′-DOM-Gly 3 Ser-OVA-Gly 3 Ser-6 ⁇ His-C′ (Dom-OVA; 6 F) are able to mitigate the OVA-specific immune response in draining lymphnodes after intradermal challenge with OVA and the adjuvant LPS.
  • FIGS. 7 A- 7 B shows the characterization of F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 80 and F1b-OVA-m 1 -n 44 -p 34 .
  • FIG. 7 A shows size-exclusion HPLC traces of F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 80 (open triangles), F1b-OVA-m 1 -n 44 -p 34 (filled circles) and unconjugated OVA (solid line). Shift to the left represents an increase in molecular weight.
  • FIG. 7 A shows size-exclusion HPLC traces of F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 80 (open triangles), F1b-OVA-m 1 -n 44 -p 34 (filled circles) and unconjugated OVA (solid line). Shift to the left represents an increase in molecular weight.
  • FIG. 7 A shows size-exclusion HPLC traces of F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 80 (open triangles), F1b-OVA
  • the two known asialoglycoprotein receptors (“ASGPRs”) are expressed on hepatocytes and liver sinusoidal endothelial cells (or “LSECs”).
  • Other galactose/galactosamine/N-acetylgalactosamine receptors can be found in various forms on multiple cell types [e.g., dendritic cells, hepatocytes, LSECs, and Kupffer cells]. While the molecular and cellular targets of glucose, glucosamine and N-acetylglucosamine can be distinct from those of the corresponding galactose isomers, it has been found that the corresponding compounds of Formula 1 where Z is a galactosylating moiety are comparably effective.
  • Dendritic cells are considered “professional antigen presenting cells,” because their primary function is to present antigens to the immune system for generating immune responses. Some cells within the liver are known to be able to present antigens, but the liver is more known to be involved in tolerogenesis. The liver is understood to be a tolerogenic organ. For example, lower incidences of rejection are reported in cases of multiple organ transplants when the liver is one of the organs transplanted. LSECs are much newer to the literature; consequently their role in tolerogenesis and/or moderation of inflammatory immune responses is not yet widely acknowledged or well understood. However, it is becoming clear that they also can play a significant role in the induction of antigen-specific tolerance.
  • glycosylation i.e., the presence of significant numbers of glycosylated proteins.
  • glycophorins e.g., glycophorin A
  • Glycophorins are proteins with many covalently attached sugar chains, the end terminus of which is sialic acid. As an erythrocyte ages and becomes ripe for clearance, the terminal sialic acid of its glycophorins tends to be lost, leaving N-acetylgalactosamine at the free end.
  • N-acetylgalactosamine is a ligand selectively received by the ASGPR associated with hepatic cells, leading to binding of N-acetylgalactosamine-containing substances by hepatic cells and their subsequent uptake and processing in the liver.
  • glycosylation of a therapeutic agent in a manner that results in hepatic targeting should be avoided due to first-pass clearance by the liver resulting in poor circulation half-life of the therapeutic agent.
  • some monoclonal antibodies need to be specifically glycosylated at ASN297 for optimal binding to their Fc receptors. It has now surprisingly been found that galactosylation can be used in a manner that induces tolerogenesis.
  • the present disclosure provides certain therapeutic compositions that are targeted for delivery to (and for uptake by) the liver, particularly hepatocytes, LSECs, Kupffer cells and/or stellate cells, more particularly hepatocytes and/or LSECs, and even more particularly to specifically bind ASGPR.
  • Liver-targeting facilitates two mechanisms of treatment: tolerization and clearance.
  • Tolerization takes advantage of the liver's role in clearing apoptotic cells and processing their proteins to be recognized by the immune system as “self,” as well as the liver's role in sampling peripheral proteins for immune tolerance. Clearance takes advantage of the liver's role in blood purification by rapidly removing and breaking down toxins, polypeptides and the like.
  • a galactosylating moiety e.g., galactose, galactosamine and N-acetylgalactosamine, particularly conjugated at C1, C2 or C6
  • another liver-targeting moiety e.g., a monoclonal antibody, or a fragment or an scFv thereof
  • de-sialylating a polypeptide for which such liver-targeting is desired e.g., a monoclonal antibody, or a fragment or an scFv thereof
  • the galactosylating or other liver-targeting moiety can be chemically conjugated or recombinantly fused to an antigen, whereas desialylation exposes a galactose-like moiety on an antigen polypeptide.
  • the antigen can be endogenous (a self-antigen) or exogenous (a foreign antigen), including but not limited to: a foreign transplant antigen against which transplant recipients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., transplant rejection), a foreign food, animal, plant or environmental antigen to which patients develop an unwanted immune (e.g., allergic or hypersensitivity) response, a therapeutic agent to which patients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., hypersensitivity and/or reduced therapeutic activity), a self-antigen to which patients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., autoimmune disease), or a tolerogenic portion (e.g., a fragment or an epitope) thereof; these compositions are useful for inducing tolerization to the antigen.
  • a foreign transplant antigen against which transplant recipients develop an unwanted immune response e.g., transplant rejection
  • a foreign food, animal, plant or environmental antigen to which patients develop an unwanted immune (e.g., allergic or hypersensitivity) response e.g., a therapeutic agent to which patients develop an unwanted immune
  • the galactosylating or other liver-targeting moiety can be conjugated to an antibody, antibody fragment or ligand that specifically binds a circulating protein or peptide or antibody, which circulating protein or peptide or antibody is causatively involved in transplant rejection, immune response against a therapeutic agent, autoimmune disease, and/or allergy (as discussed above); these compositions are useful for clearing the circulating protein, peptide or antibody. Accordingly, the compositions of the present disclosure can be used for treating an unwanted immune response, e.g., transplant rejection, an immune response against a therapeutic agent, an autoimmune disease, and/or an allergy.
  • an unwanted immune response e.g., transplant rejection, an immune response against a therapeutic agent, an autoimmune disease, and/or an allergy.
  • compositions containing a therapeutically effective amount of a composition of the disclosure admixed with at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
  • the disclosure provides methods for the treatment of an unwanted immune response, such as transplant rejection, response against a therapeutic agent, autoimmune disease or allergy.
  • an “antigen” is any substance that serves as a target for the receptors of an adaptive immune response, such as the T cell receptor, B cell receptor or an antibody.
  • An antigen may originate from within the body (“self,” “auto” or “endogenous”).
  • An antigen may originate from outside the body (“non-self,” “foreign” or “exogenous”), having entered, for example, by inhalation, ingestion, injection, or transplantation.
  • Foreign antigens include, but are not limited to, food antigens, animal antigens, plant antigens, environmental antigens, therapeutic agents, as well as antigens present in an allograft transplant.
  • an “antigen-binding molecule” as used herein relates to molecules, in particular to proteins such as immunoglobulin molecules, which contain antibody variable regions providing a specific binding to an epitope.
  • the antibody variable region can be present in, for example, a complete antibody, an antibody fragment, and a recombinant derivative of an antibody or antibody fragment.
  • Antigen-binding fragments containing antibody variable regions include (without limitation) “Fv”, “Fab”, and “F(ab′) 2 ” regions, “single domain antibodies (sdAb)”, “nanobodies”, “single chain Fv (scFv)” fragments, “tandem scFvs” (VHA-VLA-VHB-VLB), “diabodies”, “triabodies” or “tribodies”, “single-chain diabodies (scDb)”, and “bi-specific T-cell engagers (BiTEs)”.
  • a “chemical modification” refers to a change in the naturally-occurring chemical structure of one or more amino acids of a polypeptide. Such modifications can be made to a side chain or a terminus, e.g., changing the amino-terminus or carboxyl terminus. In some embodiments, the modifications are useful for creating chemical groups that can conveniently be used to link the polypeptides to other materials, or to attach a therapeutic agent.
  • Constant changes can generally be made to an amino acid sequence without altering activity. These changes are termed “conservative substitutions” or mutations; that is, an amino acid belonging to a grouping of amino acids having a particular size or characteristic can be substituted for another amino acid. Substitutes for an amino acid sequence can be selected from other members of the class to which the amino acid belongs.
  • the nonpolar (hydrophobic) amino acids include alanine, leucine, isoleucine, valine, proline, phenylalanine, tryptophan, methionine, and tyrosine.
  • the polar neutral amino acids include glycine, serine, threonine, cysteine, tyrosine, asparagine and glutamine.
  • the positively charged (basic) amino acids include arginine, lysine and histidine.
  • the negatively charged (acidic) amino acids include aspartic acid and glutamic acid.
  • Such substitutions are not expected to substantially affect apparent molecular weight as determined by polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis or isoelectric point.
  • Conservative substitutions also include substituting optical isomers of the sequences for other optical isomers, specifically D amino acids for L amino acids for one or more residues of a sequence. Moreover, all of the amino acids in a sequence can undergo a D to L isomer substitution.
  • Exemplary conservative substitutions include, but are not limited to, Lys for Arg and vice versa to maintain a positive charge; Glu for Asp and vice versa to maintain a negative charge; Ser for Thr so that a free —OH is maintained; and Gln for Asn to maintain a free —NH 2 .
  • Yet another type of conservative substitution constutes the case where amino acids with desired chemical reactivities are introduced to impart reactive sites for chemical conjugation reactions, if the need for chemical derivativization arises.
  • Such amino acids include but are not limited to Cys (to insert a sulfhydryl group), Lys (to insert a primary amine), Asp and Glu (to insert a carboxylic acid group), or specialized noncanonical amino acids containing ketone, azide, alkyne, alkene, and tetrazine side-chains.
  • Conservative substitutions or additions of free —NH 2 or —SH bearing amino acids can be particularly advantageous for chemical conjugation with the linkers and galactosylating moieties of Formula 1.
  • point mutations, deletions, and insertions of the polypeptide sequences or corresponding nucleic acid sequences can in some cases be made without a loss of function of the polypeptide or nucleic acid fragment.
  • Substitutions can include, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 or more residues.
  • a variant usable in the present invention may exhibit a total number of up to 200 (up to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, or 200) changes in the amino acid sequence (i.e. exchanges, insertions, deletions, N-terminal truncations, and/or C-terminal truncations).
  • amino acid residues described herein employ either the single letter amino acid designator or the three-letter abbreviation in keeping with the standard polypeptide nomenclature, J. Biol. Chem., (1969), 243, 3552-3559. All amino acid residue sequences are represented herein by formulae with left and right orientation in the conventional direction of amino-terminus to carboxy-terminus.
  • an effective amount refers to that amount of a composition of the disclosure that is sufficient to effect treatment, as defined below, when administered to a mammal in need of such treatment. This amount will vary depending upon the subject and disease condition being treated, the weight and age of the subject, the severity of the disease condition, the particular composition of the disclosure chosen, the dosing regimen to be followed, timing of administration, manner of administration and the like, all of which can readily be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • an “epitope”, also known as antigenic determinant, is the segment of a macromolecule, e.g. a protein, which is recognized by the adaptive immune system, such as by antibodies, B cells, or T cells.
  • An epitope is that part or segment of a macromolecule capable capable of binding to an antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof.
  • binding in particular relates to a specific binding.
  • epipe refers to the segment of protein or polyprotein that is recognized by the immune system.
  • galactose is well known in the art and refers to a monosaccharide sugar that exists both in open-chain form and in cyclic form, having D- and L-isomers. In the cyclic form there are two anomers, namely alpha and beta. In the alpha form, the C1 alcohol group is in the axial position, whereas in the beta form, the C1 alcohol group is in the equatorial position.
  • “galactose” refers to the cyclic six-membered pyranose, more in particular the D-isomer and even more particularly the alpha-D-form ( ⁇ -D-galactopyranose).
  • Glucose is an isomer of galactose. The structure and numbering of galactose and glucose are illustrated below.
  • galactosylating moiety refers to a particular type of liver-targeting moiety.
  • Galactosylating moieties include, but are not limited to a galactose, galactosamine and/or N-acetylgalactosamine residue.
  • a “glucosylating moiety” refers to another particular type of liver-targeting moiety and includes glucose, glucosamine and/or N-acetylglucosamine.
  • liver-targeting moiety refers to moieties having the ability to direct, e.g., a polypeptide, to the liver.
  • the liver comprises different cell types, including but not limited to hepatocytes, sinusoidal epithelial cells, Kupffer cells, stellate cells, and/or dendritic cells.
  • a liver-targeting moiety directs a polypeptide to one or more of these cells.
  • receptors are present which recognize and specifically bind the liver-targeting moiety.
  • Liver-targeting can be achieved by chemical conjugation of an antigen or ligand to a galactosylating or glucosylating moiety, desialylation of an antigen or ligand to expose underlying galactosyl or glucosyl moieties, or specific binding of an endogenous antibody to an antigen or ligand, where the antigen or ligand is: desilylated to expose underlying galactosyl or glucosyl moieties, conjugated to a galactosylating or a glucosylating moiety.
  • Naturally occurring desilylated proteins are not encompassed within the scope of the present disclosure.
  • n can be an integer from about 1 to 100 (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 25, 30, 34, 35, 37, 40, 41, 45, 50, 54, 55, 59, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 82, 83, 85, 88, 90, 95, 99, 100, 105 or 110) and that the disclosed mixture encompasses ranges such as 1-4, 2-4, 2-6, 3-8, 7-13, 6-14, 18-23, 26-30, 42-50, 46-57, 60-78, 85-90
  • a peptide that specifically binds a particular target is referred to as a “ligand” for that target.
  • polypeptide is a term that refers to a chain of amino acid residues, regardless of post-translational modification (e.g., phosphorylation or glycosylation) and/or complexation with additional polypeptides, and/or synthesis into multisubunit complexes with nucleic acids and/or carbohydrates, or other molecules. Proteoglycans therefore also are referred to herein as polypeptides.
  • polypeptides can be produced by a number of methods, many of which are well known in the art. For example, polypeptides can be obtained by extraction (e.g., from isolated cells), by expression of a recombinant nucleic acid encoding the polypeptide, or by chemical synthesis. Polypeptides can be produced by, for example, recombinant technology, and expression vectors encoding the polypeptide introduced into host cells (e.g., by transformation or transfection) for expression of the encoded polypeptide
  • “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” or “pharmaceutically acceptable excipient” includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents and the like. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active ingredient, its use in the therapeutic compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active ingredients can also be incorporated into the compositions.
  • purified refers to a polypeptide that has been chemically synthesized and is thus substantially uncontaminated by other polypeptides, or has been separated or isolated from most other cellular components by which it is naturally accompanied (e.g., other cellular proteins, polynucleotides, or cellular components).
  • An example of a purified polypeptide is one that is at least 70%, by dry weight, free from the proteins and naturally occurring organic molecules with which it naturally associates.
  • a preparation of a purified polypeptide therefore can be, for example, at least 80%, at least 90%, or at least 99%, by dry weight, the polypeptide.
  • Polypeptides also can be engineered to contain a tag sequence (e.g., a polyhistidine tag, a myc tag, a FLAG® tag, or other affinity tag) that facilitates purification or marking (e.g., capture onto an affinity matrix, visualization under a microscope).
  • a purified composition that comprises a polypeptide refers to a purified polypeptide unless otherwise indicated.
  • isolated indicates that the polypeptides or nucleic acids of the disclosure are not in their natural environment. Isolated products of the disclosure can thus be contained in a culture supernatant, partially enriched, produced from heterologous sources, cloned in a vector or formulated with a vehicle, etc.
  • sequence identity is used with regard to polypeptide sequence comparisons. This expression in particular refers to a percentage of sequence identity, for example at least 80%, at least 81%, at least 82%, at least 83%, at least 84%, at least 85%, at least 86%, at least 87%, at least 88%, at least 89%, at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, or at least 99% to the respective reference polypeptide or to the respective reference polynucleotide.
  • the polypeptide in question and the reference polypeptide exhibit the indicated sequence identity over a continuous stretch of 20, 30, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 or more amino acids or over the entire length of the reference polypeptide.
  • Specific binding refers to a molecule that binds to a target with a relatively high affinity as compared to non-target tissues, and generally involves a plurality of non-covalent interactions, such as electrostatic interactions, van der Waals interactions, hydrogen bonding, and the like. Specific binding interactions characterize antibody-antigen binding, enzyme-substrate binding, and certain protein-receptor interactions; while such molecules might bind tissues besides their specific targets from time to time, to the extent that such non-target binding is inconsequential, the high-affinity binding pair can still fall within the definition of specific binding.
  • treatment means any treatment of a disease or disorder in a mammal, including:
  • the term “unwanted immune response” refers to a reaction by the immune system of a subject, which in the given situation is not desirable.
  • the reaction of the immune system is unwanted if such reaction does not lead to the prevention, reduction, or healing of a disease or disorder but instead causes, enhances or worsens a disorder or disease.
  • a reaction of the immune system causes, enhances or worsens a disease if it is directed against an inappropriate target.
  • an unwanted immune response includes but is not limited to transplant rejection, immune response against a therapeutic agent, autoimmune disease, and allergy or hypersensitivity.
  • variant is to be understood as a protein which differs in comparison to the protein from which it is derived by one or more changes in its length, sequence, or structure.
  • the polypeptide from which a protein variant is derived is also known as the parent polypeptide or polynucleotide.
  • variant comprises “fragments” or “derivatives” of the parent molecule. Typically, “fragments” are smaller in length or size than the parent molecule, whilst “derivatives” exhibit one or more differences in their sequence or structure in comparison to the parent molecule.
  • modified molecules such as but not limited to post-translationally modified proteins (e.g.
  • variants glycosylated, phosphorylated, ubiquitinated, palmitoylated, or proteolytically cleaved proteins
  • modified nucleic acids such as methylated DNA.
  • variants Naturally occurring and artificially constructed variants are to be understood to be encompassed by the term “variant” as used herein.
  • variants usable in the present invention may also be derived from homologs, orthologs, or paralogs of the parent molecule or from artificially constructed variant, provided that the variant exhibits at least one biological activity of the parent molecule, i.e. is functionally active.
  • a variant can be characterized by a certain degree of sequence identity to the parent polypeptide from which it is derived. More precisely, a protein variant in the context of the present disclosure may exhibit at least 80% sequence identity to its parent polypeptide. Preferably, the sequence identity of protein variants is over a continuous stretch of 20, 30, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 or more amino acids.
  • compositions relates to compositions, pharmaceutical formulations, and methods of treatment employing such compositions, as represented by Formula 1:
  • compositions of Formula 1 include the sub-genuses where X is a foreign transplant antigen against which transplant recipients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., transplant rejection), a foreign food, animal, plant or environmental antigen against which patients develop an unwanted immune (e.g., allergic or hypersensitivity) response, a foreign therapeutic agent against which patients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., hypersensitivity and/or reduced therapeutic activity), or a self-antigen against which patients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., autoimmune disease); where Y is a linker of Formulae Ya through Yp; and/or where Z is galactose, galactosamine, N-acetylgalactosamine, glucose, glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine as illustrated by Formulae 1a through 1p as described below with reference to the Reaction Schemes.
  • X is a foreign transplant antigen against which transplant recipients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., transplant rejection), a foreign food, animal, plant or environmental antigen against
  • X can be an antibody, antibody fragment or ligand that specifically binds a circulating protein or peptide or antibody, which circulating protein or peptide or antibody is causatively involved in transplant rejection, immune response against a therapeutic agent, autoimmune disease, hypersensitivity and/or allergy.
  • Antigens employed in the practice of the present disclosure can be one or more of the following:
  • specific antigens can be selected from: Abatacept, Abciximab, Adalimumab, Adenosine deaminase, Ado-trastuzumab emtansine, Agalsidase alfa, Agalsidase beta, Aldeslukin, Alglucerase, Alglucosidase alfa, ⁇ -1-proteinase inhibitor, Anakinra, Anistreplase (anisoylated plasminogen streptokinase activator complex), Antithrombin III, Antithymocyte globulin, Ateplase, Bevacizumab, Bivalirudin, Botulinum toxin type A, Botulinum toxin type B, C1-esterase inhibitor, Canakinumab, Carboxypeptidase G2 (Glucarpidase and Voraxaze
  • Particular therapeutic protein, peptide, antibody or antibody-like molecules include Abciximab, Adalimumab, Agalsidase alfa, Agalsidase beta, Aldeslukin, Alglucosidase alfa, Factor VIII, Factor IX, Infliximab, Insulin (including rHu Insulin), L-asparaginase, Laronidase, Natalizumab, Octreotide, Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase (PAL), or Rasburicase (uricase) and generally IgG monoclonal antibodies in their varying formats.
  • Another particular group includes the hemostatic agents (Factor VIII and IX), Insulin (including rHu Insulin), and the non-human therapeutics uricase, PAL and asparaginase.
  • specific antigens can be selected from:
  • MBP13-32 (SEQ ID NO: 11) KYLATASTMDHARHGFLPRH; MBP83-99: (SEQ ID NO: 12) ENPWHFFKNIVTPRTP; MBP111-129: (SEQ ID NO: 13) LSRFSWGAEGQRPGFGYGG; MBP146-170: (SEQ ID NO: 14) AQGTLSKIFKLGGRDSRSGSPMARR; MOG1-20: (SEQ ID NO: 15) GQFRVIGPRHPIRALVGDEV; MOG35-55: (SEQ ID NO: 16) MEVGWYRPPFSRWHLYRNGK; and PLP139-154: (SEQ ID NO: 17) HCLGKWLGHPDKFVGI.
  • antigen is a foreign antigen against which an unwanted immune response is developed, such as to animal, plant and environmental antigens
  • specific antigens can, for example, be: cat, mouse, dog, horse, bee, dust, tree and goldenrod, including the following proteins or peptides derived from:
  • Pharmaceutically relevant proteins that have previously been hyperglycosylated and can be desialylated for hepatocyte-ASGPR taregeting include: interferon alfa and gamma, luteinizing hormone, Fv antibody fragments, asparaginase, cholinesterase, darbepoetin alfa (AraNESP®; Amgen), trombopoietin, leptin, FSH, IFN- ⁇ 2, serum albumin, and corifollitropin alfa.
  • such moieties are chosen to specifically bind a targeted circulating protein or peptide or antibody, and result in hepatic uptake of the circulating targeted moiety, possibly as an adduct with the targeting moiety, ultimately resulting in the clearance and inactivation of the circulating targeted moiety.
  • a targeted circulating protein or peptide or antibody for example, liver-targeted Factor VIII will bind and clear circulating Factor VIII antibodies. Procedures for the identification of such moieties will be familiar to those skilled in the art.
  • the linkers employed in the compositions of the present disclosure (“Y” in Formula 1) can include N-hydroxysuccinamidyl linkers, malaemide linkers, vinylsulfone linkers, pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol) linkers, pyridyl di-thiol linkers, n-nitrophenyl carbonate linkers, NHS-ester linkers, nitrophenoxy poly(ethylene glycol)ester linkers and the like.
  • linkers Formula Y′-CMP include Formula Y′-CMP, the R 9 substituent is an ethylacetamido group, and even more particularly the ethylacetamido is conjugated with C1 of N-acetylgalactosamine or N-acetylglucosamine.
  • Di-thiol-containing linkers particularly particularly disulfanylethyl carbamate-containing linkers (named including a free amine of X, otherwise named a “disulfanyl ethyl ester” without including the free amine of X) are particularly advantageous in the present compositions as having the ability to cleave and release an antigen in its original form once inside a cell, for example as illustrated below (where Y′ indicates the remaining portion of the linker and X′ and Z are as defined).
  • Z is galactose, galactosamine or N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C1.
  • Linkers of Formula Yn can be synthisized via certain precursors that render Yn particularly suitable for conjugation to hydrophobic antigens.
  • linkers shown above as Formulae Yh through Yn are synthesized as isomers that are employed without separation.
  • the linkers of Formulae Yh, Yi, Yj and Yn will be a mixture of the 8,9-dihydro-1H-dibenzo[b,t][1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-d]azocin-8yl and 8,9-dihydro-3H-dibenzo[b,][1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-d]azocin-8yl structures illustrated below:
  • linkers of Formulae Yk, YL and Ym will be a mixture of the 8,9-dihydro-1H-dibenzo[3,4:7,8]cycloocta[1,2-d][1,2,3]triazol-8-yl and 8,9-dihydro-1H-dibenzo[3,4:7,8]cycloocta[1,2-d][1,2,3]triazol-9-yl structures illustrated below:
  • the galactosylating moieties employed in the compositions of the present disclosure serve to target the compositions to liver cells (for example, specifically binding hepatocytes) and can be selected from: galactose, galactosamine or N-acetylgalactosamine.
  • the glucosylating moieties employed in the compositions of the present disclosure serve to target the compositions to liver cells (for example, specifically binding hepatocytes) and can be selected from: glucose, glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine.
  • galactosylating moieties include galactose or glucose conjugated at C1 or C6, galactosamine or glucosamine conjugated at C2, and N-acetylgalactosamine or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C6.
  • Other particular liver-targeting moieties include N-acetylgalactosamine or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C2, more particularly conjugated to a linker bearing an R 9 substituent that is CH 2 .
  • liver-targeting moieties include galactose, galactosamine, N-acetylgalactosamine, glucose, glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C1, more particularly conjugated to a linker bearing an R 9 substituent that is an ethylacetamido group.
  • compositions of Formula 1 can be named using a combination of IUPAC and trivial names.
  • Y is Formula Ya
  • m is 1
  • n is 4
  • Z is N-acetylgalactosamin-2-yl or N-acetylglucosamin-2-yl:
  • composition of the disclosure where X is tissue transglutaminase can be named (Z)-(21-(tissue transglutaminase)-1-oxo-1-((2,4,5-trihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)amino)-4,7,10,13-tetraoxa-16,17-dithiahenicosan-21-ylidene)triaz-1-yn-2-ium chloride, so the corresponding composition of the disclosure where X is tissue transglutaminase can be named (Z)-(21-(tissue transglutaminase)-1-oxo-1-((2,4,5-trihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)amino)-4,7,10,13-tetraoxa-16,17-dithiahenicosan-21-ylidene)triaz-1-yn-2-ium chloride.
  • composition of the disclosure where X′ is tissue transglutaminase, m is 2, n is 4 and Z′ is N-acetylgalactosamin-2-yl or N-acetylglucosamin-2-yl can be named (3Z)-((tissue transgultaminase)-1,3-diylbis(1-oxo-1-((2,4,5-trihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)amino)-4,7,10,13-tetraoxa-16,17-dithiahenicosan-21-yl-21-ylidene))bis(triaz-1-yn-2-ium) chloride.
  • compositions of Formula 1 can be named using an alternative naming system by reference to X and correspondence to one of Formulae 1a to 1p (as illustrated in the reaction schemes) followed by recitation of the integers for variables m, n, p and/or q, R 8 , R 9 and identification of the galactosylating moiety and the position at which it is conjugated.
  • composition of Formula 1a where X is ovalbumin, m is 2, n is 4 and Z is N-acetylgalactosamin-2-yl can be named “F1a-OVA-m 2 -n 4 -2NAcGAL.”
  • the corresponding composition of Formula 1a where X is ovalbumin, m is 2, n is 4 and Z is N-acetylglucosamin-2-yl can be named “F1a-OVA-m 2 -n 4 -2NAcGLU.”
  • both isomers can be named “F1n-insulin-m 1 -n 1 -p 1 -q 4 -CMP-EtAcN-1NAcGAL” where CMP indicates that R 8 is 1-cyano-1-methyl-propyl, EtAcN indicates that R 9 is ethylacetamido and 1NAcGAL indicates Z′′ is N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C1. Absence of the abbreviation EtAcN before the designation for Z would indicate that R 9 is a direct bond.
  • compositions of Formula 1 can be prepared, for example, by adjusting the procedures described in Zhu, L., et al., Bioconjugate Chem. 2010, 21, 2119-2127. Syntheses of certain compositions of Formula 1 are also described below with reference to Reaction Schemes 1 to 14. Other synthetic approaches will be apparent to those skilled in the art.
  • R 1 is a free surface amino (—NH 2 ) or thiol (—SH) moiety positioned on X's three-dimensional structure so as to be accessible for conjugation to a linker
  • X′ represents the remainder of X excluding the identified free amino group(s) [(X′′ is used in the reaction schemes to represent the remainder of X excluding free thiol group(s)].
  • X there will be at least one (the N-terminal amine) and can be multiple R 1 groups (predominantly from lysine residues or cysteine residues that are not involved in disulfide bonding), as represented by m, which is an integer from about 1 to 100, more typically 1 or from about 4 to 20, and most typically 1 to about 10.
  • solvent inert organic solvent or “inert solvent” mean a solvent inert under the conditions of the reaction being described in conjunction therewith [including, for example, benzene, toluene, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran (“THF”), dimethylformamide (“DMF”), chloroform, methylene chloride (or dichloromethane), diethyl ether, methanol, pyridine and the like].
  • solvents used in the reactions of the present disclosure are inert organic solvents.
  • q.s. means adding a quantity sufficient to achieve a stated function, e.g., to bring a solution to the desired volume (i.e., 100%).
  • Isolation and purification of the compounds and intermediates described herein can be effected, if desired, by any suitable separation or purification procedure such as, for example, filtration, extraction, crystallization, column chromatography, thin-layer chromatography or thick-layer chromatography, centrifugal size exclusion chromatography, high-performance liquid chromatography, recrystallization, sublimation, fast protein liquid chromatography, gel electrophoresis, dialysis, or a combination of these procedures.
  • suitable separation and isolation procedures can be had by reference to the examples hereinbelow. However, other equivalent separation or isolation procedures can, of course, also be used.
  • Characterization of reaction products can be made by customary means, e.g., proton and carbon NMR, mass spectrometry, size exclusion chromatography, infrared spectroscopy, gel electrophoresis.
  • Reaction Scheme 1 illustrates the preparation of compositions of Formula 1 where Z can be galactose, glucose, galactosamine, glucosamine, N-acetylgalactosamine or N-acetylglucosamine.
  • Z′ as employed in Reaction Scheme 1 encompases galactose or glucose conjugated at C1 and C6 and corresponding to the following structures according to Formula 1:
  • surface thiol group(s) can be generated on an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having free surface amino group(s) (Formula 101′) by contact with a Traut reagent (Formula 102) at a pH of about 8.0 for about 1 hour to give the Formula 103′, from which unreacted Traut's reagent is removed, e.g., via centrifugal size exclusion chromatography.
  • a pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-NHS ester (Formula 104) is contacted with galactosamine or glucosamine (Formula 105 where R 3 is NH 2 and R 2 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 are OH) with stirring at about pH 8 for about 1 hour to give the corresponding pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-sugar of Formula 106A, which can be used without further purification.
  • Step 4 the acid of Formula 109 is contacted with a protected galactose or N-acetylgalactosamine of Formula 105 where R 2 is OH and R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 are protecting groups (“PG”), where R 6 is OH and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 are PG, or where R 6 is N-acetyl and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 are PG to give the corresponding pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-sugars of Formulae 106B, 106C and 106D, which can be used following de-protection.
  • PG protecting groups
  • Step 5 to a stirred solution of the product of Step 1 (Formula 103′) is added an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of the product of Step 2 or Step 4 (Formula 106, i.e., 106A, 106B, 106C or 106D) for about 1 hour, followed by centrifugal sized exclusion chromatography to remove any free remaining reactants to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1a, respectively, Formula 1aA, Formula 1aB, Formula 1aC and Formula 1aD.
  • compositions corresponding to Formula 1a can be named, respectively, e.g., as follows:
  • Z′′ refers to N-acetylgalactosamine or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C2:
  • C1 conjugated compositions need to be protected during synthesis, for example by cyclizing the amine with the C3 hydroxyl and de-protecting following incorporation of the protected galactosamine into the adjacent portion of the linker.
  • the poly(galactose methacrylate) and poly(glucose methacrylate) reactants of Formulae 201, 401, 501, 601, 701, 803 and 1401 can be prepared by methacrylating galactose or glucose, e.g., contacting galactosamine and methacrylate anhydride, followed by reversible addition-fragmentation chain transfer (RAFT) polymerization with a corresponding RAFT agent in the presence of azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN) in a suitable solvent, starting with freeze-thaw cycles followed by heating at about 60-80° C., preferably 70° C. for about 5-8, preferably about 6 hours.
  • the polymer can be precipitated in a lower alkanol, preferably methanol.
  • Step 1 an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having free surface thiol group(s) prepared, e.g., as described with reference to Reaction Scheme 1, Step 1 (Formula 103′) is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol) of Formula 201 for about 1 hour to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1b.
  • compositions of Formula 1b can be named as follows:
  • an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface thiol group(s) (cysteines) [Formula 101′′ corresponding to Formula 101 and illustrating where X′′, as the term will be subsequently employed, represents X excluding the identified free surface thiol group(s)] is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol) of Formula 201 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1c.
  • compositions corresponding to Formula 1c can be named as follows:
  • an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface thiol group(s) of Formula 101′′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a pyridyl di-thiol of Formula 401 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1d.
  • compositions corresponding to Formula 1d can be named as follows:
  • an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface amino group(s) of Formula 101′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a n-nitrophenyl carbonate of Formula 501 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1e.
  • compositions corresponding to Formula 1e can be named as follows:
  • an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface amino group(s) of Formula 101′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a n-nitrophenyl carbonate poly(ethylene glycol)ester of Formula 601 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1f.
  • compositions corresponding to Formula 1f can be named as follows:
  • an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface amino group(s) of Formula 101′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a NHS-ester poly(ethylene glycol)ester of Formula 701 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1g.
  • compositions corresponding to Formula 1g can be named as follows:
  • Step 1 an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface amino group(s) of Formula 101′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of an amine-reactive linker for Click chemistry of Formula 801 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 802.
  • Step 2 the product of Formula 802 is then contacted with an equivalent amount (again corresponding to the value of m) of a galactos(amine) polymer of Formula 803 to yield the corresponding isomeric product according to Formula 1h.
  • the two isomers, illustrated above, result from non-specific cyclization of the azide of Formula 803 with the triple bond of Formula 802. Such non-specific cyclization occurs in the synthesis of other compositions where Y is selected from Formulae Yh through Yn, but will not be illustrated in each instance.
  • compositions corresponding to Formula 1 h can be named as follows:
  • Step 1 an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface thiol group(s) of Formula 101′′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a thiol-reactive linker for Click chemistry of Formula 901 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 902′′.
  • Step 2 the product of Formula 902′′ is then contacted with an equivalent amount (again corresponding to the value of m) of a galactos(amine) polymer of Formula 803 to yield the corresponding isomeric product according to Formula 1i.
  • compositions corresponding to Formula 1i can be named as follows:
  • compositions corresponding to Formula 1j can be named as follows:
  • Step 1 an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface thiol group(s) of Formula 101′′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a thiol-reactive linker for Click chemistry of Formula 1001 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1002.
  • Step 2 the product of Formula 1002 is then contacted with an equivalent amount (again corresponding to the value of m) of a galactos(amine) polymer of Formula 803 to yield the corresponding isomeric product according to Formula 1k.
  • compositions corresponding to Formula 1k can be named as follows:
  • compositions corresponding to Formula 1 L can be named as follows:
  • Step 1 galactose, protected galactosamine or N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine (Formula 1101 where R 3 and R 4 are OH, R 3 is NH-protecting group (e.g., cyclized with R 4 ) or R 3 is NHAc and R 4 is OH, respectively) is contacted with 2-chloroethan-1-ol followed by cooling and the dropwise addition of acetylchloride. The solution is warmed to room temperature and then heated to 70° C. for several hours. Ethanol is added to the crude product and the resulting solution is stirred in the presence of carbon and then filtered followed by solvent removal to yield the corresponding product of Formula 1102.
  • R 3 and R 4 are OH, R 3 is NH-protecting group (e.g., cyclized with R 4 ) or R 3 is NHAc and R 4 is OH, respectively) is contacted with 2-chloroethan-1-ol followed by cooling and the dropwise addition of acety
  • Step 2 the product of Formula 1102 is added to an excess of sodium azide and heated to 90° C. for several hours, then filtered followed by solvent removal to yield the corresponding product of Formula 1103.
  • Step 3 the product of Formula 1103 is added to a solution of palladium on carbon and ethanol, and stirred under hydrogen gas (3 atm) for several hours, then filtered followed by solvent removal to yield the corresponding product of Formula 1104.
  • Step 4 the product of Formula 1104 is added to a solution of methacrylate anhydride. Triethylamine is added and the reaction stirred for 2 hours followed by solvent removal and isolation to yield the corresponding product of Formula 1105.
  • an azide-modified uRAFT agent (Formula 1106) is added to a solution of the product of Formula 1105 with azobisisobutyronitrile, subjected to 4 free-pump-thaw cycles and then stirred at 70° C. After several hours the corresponding polymer product of Formula 1107 is precipitated by addition of a lower alkanol followed by solvent removal.
  • R 3 is NH-protecting group (e.g., cyclized with R 4 ) the protecting group(s) is(are) removed at this point.
  • Step 6 an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface amino group(s) of Formula 101′ is added to a pH 8.0 buffer and contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a dioxopyrrolidine of Formula 1108 with stirring. After 1 hour unreacted Formula 1108 is removed and the resulting product of Formula 1109 is used without further purification.
  • Step 7 the product of Formula 1107 is added to a pH 8.0 buffer, to which is added the product of Formula 1109. After stirring for 2 hours, the excess Formula 1107 is removed to yield the corresponding isomeric product of Formula 1 m.
  • compositions corresponding to Formula 1 m can be named as follows:
  • Reaction Scheme 12 is particularly suitable for hydrophobic antigens, antibodies, antibody fragments and ligands (e.g., Insulin) due to the use of organic solvents.
  • ligands e.g., Insulin
  • Step 1 an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface amino group(s) of Formula 101′ is dissolved in an organic solvent (e.g., DMF) containing triethylamine. To this is added an amount (corresponding to the value of m) of a compound of Formula 1201 followed by stirring and the addition of t-butyl methyl ether. The corresponding product of Formula 1202 is recovered as a precipitate.
  • an organic solvent e.g., DMF
  • the product of Formula 1202 is resuspended in the organic solvent and an amount (corresponding to the value of m) of Formula 1107 (obtained, e.g., as described with reference to Reaction Scheme 11) is added followed by stirring.
  • the reaction product is precipitated via the addition of dichloromethane, followed by filtration and solvent removal. Purification (e.g., resuspension in PBS followed by centrifugal size exclusion chromatography yields the corresponding isomeric product of Formula 1 n.
  • compositions corresponding to Formula 1n can be named as follows:
  • Step 1 a nitrophenoxycarbonyl-oxyalkyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-NHS ester (Formula 1301) is contacted with galactose, galactosamine or N-acetylgalactosamine (Formula 105) to give the corresponding product of Formula 1302, along with the other two illustrated products, from which the desired nitrophenoxycarbonyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-carboxyethyl galactose, galactosamine or N-acetylgalactosamine of Formula 1302 is isolated before proceeding to the next step.
  • an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface amino group(s) of Formula 101′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of the product of Formula 1302 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 10.
  • compositions corresponding to Formula 10 can be named as follows:
  • an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface amino group(s) (Formula 101′) is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-NHS ester of Formula 1401 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1p.
  • compositions corresponding to Formula 1p can be named as follows:
  • a compound of Formula 103′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a compound of Formula 106 to give the corresponding product of Formula 1a.
  • a compound of Formula 103′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a compound of Formula 201 to give the corresponding product of Formula 1b.
  • a compound of Formula 802, 902 or 1002 is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a compound of Formula 803 to give the corresponding product of Formula 1 h, Formula 1i or Formula 1k, respectively.
  • a compound of Formula 1109 is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a compound of Formula 1107 to give the corresponding product of Formula 1m, particularly where n is about 80, p is about 30, q is about 4, and m being a function of the antigen is about 2 to 10.
  • a compound of Formula 1202 is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a compound of Formula 1107 to give the corresponding product of Formula 1n, particularly where n is about 1, p is about 30, q is about 4, and m being a function of the antigen is about 2 to 10.
  • compositions, pharmaceutical formulations, methods of manufacture and use of the present disclosure are the following combinations and permutations of substituent groups of Formula 1 (sub-grouped, respectively, in increasing order of preference):
  • compositions of the disclosure find use in a variety of applications including, as will be appreciated by those in the art, treatment of transplant rejection, immune response against a therapeutic agent, autoimmune disease, and food allergy.
  • compositions of the disclosure are used to modulate, particularly down-regulate, antigen-specific undesirable immune response.
  • compositions of the disclosure are useful to bind and clear from the circulation specific undesired proteins, including antibodies endogenously generated in a patient (i.e., not exogenous antibodies administered to a patient), peptides and the like, which cause autoimmunity and associated pathologies, allergy, inflammatory immune responses, and anaphylaxis.
  • antigens are targeted to the liver for presentation via antigen-presenting cells to specifically down-regulate the immune system or for clearance of unwanted circulating proteins.
  • This is distinct from previous uses of liver targeting, for example as described in US 2013/0078216, where the purpose of liver-targeting molecules such as DOM26h-196-61 was the delivery of therapeutic agents to treat liver diseases such as fibrosis, hepatitis, Cirrhosis and liver cancer.
  • compositions and methods to treat unwanted immune response to self-antigens and foreign antigens including but not limited to: a foreign transplant antigen against which transplant recipients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., transplant rejection), a foreign antigen to which patients develop an unwanted immune (e.g., allergic or hypersensitivity) response, a therapeutic agent to which patients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., hypersensitivity and/or reduced therapeutic activity), a self antigen to which patients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., autoimmune disease)
  • a foreign transplant antigen against which transplant recipients develop an unwanted immune response e.g., transplant rejection
  • a foreign antigen to which patients develop an unwanted immune e.g., allergic or hypersensitivity
  • a therapeutic agent to which patients develop an unwanted immune response e.g., hypersensitivity and/or reduced therapeutic activity
  • a self antigen to which patients develop an unwanted immune response e.g., autoimmune disease
  • Autoimmune disease states that can be treated using the methods and compositions provided herein include, but are not limited to: Acute Disseminated Encephalomyelitis (ADEM); Acute interstital allergic nephritis (drug allergies); Acute necrotizing hemorrhagic leukoencephalitis; Addison's Disease; Alopecia areata; Alopecia universalis; Ankylosing Spondylitis; Arthritis, juvenile; Arthritis, psoriatic; Arthritis, rheumatoid; Atopic Dermatitis; Autoimmune aplastic anemia; Autoimmune gastritis; Autoimmune hepatitis; Autoimmune hypophysitis; Autoimmune oophoritis; Autoimmune orchitis; Autoimmune polyendocrine syndrome type 1; Autoimmune polyendocrine syndrome type 2; Autoimmune thyroiditis; Behcet's disease; Bronchiolitis ob
  • a particular group of autoimmune disease states that can be treated using the methods and compositions provided herein include, but are not limited to: Acute necrotizing hemorrhagic leukoencephalitis; Addison's Disease; Arthritis, psoriatic; Arthritis, rheumatoid; Autoimmune aplastic anemia; Autoimmune hypophysitis; Autoimmune gastritis; Autoimmune polyendocrine syndrome type 1; Bullous pemphigoid; Celiac disease; Coxsackie myocarditis; Dermatitis herpetiformis Duhring; Diabetes mellitus (Type 1); Epidermolysis bullosa acquisita; Giant cell myocarditis; Goodpasture's syndrome; Graves' disease; Hashimoto's thyroiditis; Mixed connective tissue disease; Multiple sclerosis; Myasthenia gravis; Neuromyelitis optica; Pernicious angemis; Pemphigus vulgaris and variants;
  • treatment can be provided for reactions against, for example: peanut, apple, milk, egg whites, egg yolks, mustard, celery, shrimp, wheat (and other cereals), strawberry and banana.
  • a patient can be tested to identify a foreign antigen against which an unwanted immune response has developed, and a composition of the disclosure can be developed based on that antigen.
  • compositions and methods of the disclosure specificity in binding to antigen-presenting cells in the liver (particularly binding to hepatocytes and specifically ASGPR) should initially be determined. This can be accomplished, for example, by employing a marker (such as the fluorescent marker phycoerythrin (“PE”)) in a composition of the disclosure.
  • PE fluorescent marker
  • the composition is administered to suitable experimental subjects. Controls, e.g., unconjugated PE or vehicle (saline) are administered to other group(s) of subjects.
  • the composition and controls are allowed to circulate for a period of 1 to 5 hours, after which the spleens and livers of the subjects are harvested and measured for fluorescence. The specific cells in which fluorescence is found can be subsequently identified.
  • Compositions of the disclosure when tested in this manner, show higher levels of concentration in the antigen-presenting cells of the liver as compared with unconjugated PE or vehicle.
  • Effectiveness in immune modulation can be tested by measuring the proliferation of OT-1 CD8 + cells (transplanted into host mice) in response to the administration of a composition of the disclosure incorporating a known antigen, such as ovalbumin (“OVA”), as compared with administration of the antigen alone or just vehicle.
  • Compositions of the disclosure when tested in this manner, show an increase of OT1 cell proliferation as compared with antigen alone or vehicle, demonstrating increased CD8 + T-cell cross-priming.
  • the proliferating OT-1 CD8+ T cells can be phenotypically analyzed for molecular signatures of exhaustion [such as programmed death-1 (PD-1), FasL, and others], as well as annexin-V as a hallmark of apoptosis and thus deletion.
  • the OT-1 CD8 + T cells can also be assessed for their responsiveness to an antigen challenge with adjuvant in order to demonstrate functional non-responsiveness, and thus immune tolerance, towards the antigen. To do so, the cells are analyzed for inflammatory signatures after administration of compositions of the disclosure into host mice followed by an antigen challenge. Compositions of the disclosure when tested in this manner demonstrate very low (e.g., background) levels of inflammatory OT-1 CD8 + T cell responses towards OVA, thus demonstrating immune tolerance.
  • Humoral immune response can be tested by administering a composition of the disclosure incorporating a known antigen, such as OVA, as compared with the administration of the antigen alone or just vehicle, and measuring the levels of resulting antibodies.
  • Compositions of the disclosure when tested in this manner show very low (e.g., background) levels of antibody formation responsive to their administration and the administration of vehicle, with significantly higher levels of antibody formation responsive to administration of the antigen.
  • Effectiveness in tolerization against an antigen can be tested as above with reference to humoral immune response, where several weeks following treatment(s) with a composition of the disclosure a group of subjects is challenged by administration of the antigen alone, followed by measuring the levels of antibodies to the antigen.
  • Compositions of the disclosure when tested in this manner show low levels of antibody formation responsive to challenge with the antigen in groups pretreated with such compositions as compared to groups that are not pretreated.
  • NOD non-obese diabetic
  • EAE experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis
  • the NOD mouse develops spontaneous autoimmune diabetes (similar to type 1a diabetes in humans).
  • Groups of NOD mice are treated with test compound or a negative control, followed by measurement of BLOOD GLUCOSE.
  • Successful treatment corresponds to likelihood of treating diabetes in humans or proof of mechanism for approaches to the treatment of other autoimmune diseases. (See, e.g., Anderson and Bluestone, Annu. Rev. Immunol. 2005; 23:447-85.)
  • compositions of the disclosure are administered at a therapeutically effective dosage, e.g., a dosage sufficient to provide treatment for the disease states previously described.
  • Administration of the compounds of the disclosure or the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof can be via any of the accepted modes of administration for agents that serve similar utilities.
  • an individual human dose is from about 0.01 to 2.0 mg/kg of body weight, preferably about 0.1 to 1.5 mg/kg of body weight, and most preferably about 0.3 to 1.0 mg/kg of body weight.
  • Treatment can be administered for a single day or a period of days, and can be repeated at intervals of several days, one or several weeks, or one or several months. Administration can be as a single dose (e.g., as a bolus) or as an initial bolus followed by continuous infusion of the remaining portion of a complete dose over time, e.g., 1 to 7 days.
  • the amount of active compound administered will, of course, be dependent on any or all of the following: the subject and disease state being treated, the severity of the affliction, the manner and schedule of administration and the judgment of the prescribing physician. It will also be appreciated that amounts administered will depend upon the molecular weight of the antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand as well as the size of the linker.
  • compositions of the disclosure can be administered either alone or in combination with other pharmaceutically acceptable excipients. While all typical routes of administration are contemplated, it is presently preferred to provide liquid dosage forms suitable for injection.
  • the formulations will typically include a conventional pharmaceutical carrier or excipient and a composition of the disclosure or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • compositions can include other medicinal agents, pharmaceutical agents, carriers, and the like, including, but not limited to the therapeutic protein, peptide, antibody or antibody-like molecule corresponding to the antigen (X) employed in the composition of the disclosure, and other active agents that can act as immune-modulating agents and more specifically can have inhibitory effects on B-cells, including anti-folates, immune suppressants, cyostatics, mitotic inhibitors, and anti-metabolites, or combinations thereof.
  • active agents that can act as immune-modulating agents and more specifically can have inhibitory effects on B-cells, including anti-folates, immune suppressants, cyostatics, mitotic inhibitors, and anti-metabolites, or combinations thereof.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable composition will contain about 0.1% to 95%, preferably about 0.5% to 50%, by weight of a composition of the disclosure, the remainder being suitable pharmaceutical excipients, carriers, etc. Dosage forms or compositions containing active ingredient in the range of 0.005% to 95% with the balance made up from non-toxic carrier can be prepared.
  • Liquid pharmaceutically administrable compositions can, for example, be prepared by dissolving, dispersing, etc. an active composition of the disclosure (e.g., a lyophilized powder) and optional pharmaceutical adjuvants in a carrier, such as, for example, water (water for injection), saline, aqueous dextrose, glycerol, glycols, ethanol or the like (excluding galactoses), to thereby form a solution or suspension.
  • a carrier such as, for example, water (water for injection), saline, aqueous dextrose, glycerol, glycols, ethanol or the like (excluding galactoses)
  • the pharmaceutical composition to be administered can also contain minor amounts of nontoxic auxiliary substances such as wetting agents, emulsifying agents, stabilizing agents, solubilizing agents, pH buffering agents and the like, for example, sodium acetate, sodium citrate, cyclodextrine derivatives, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine acetate and triethanolamine oleate, etc., osmolytes, amino acids, sugars and carbohydrates, proteins and polymers, salts, surfactants, chelators and antioxidants, preservatives, and specific ligands.
  • auxiliary substances such as wetting agents, emulsifying agents, stabilizing agents, solubilizing agents, pH buffering agents and the like, for example, sodium acetate, sodium citrate, cyclodextrine derivatives, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine acetate and triethanolamine oleate, etc., osmolytes, amino acids, sugars and carbohydrates, proteins and polymers, salts, surfactants,
  • F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 80 (or F1a-OVA-m 4 -n 80 -2NGAL)
  • galactosamine (10.0 mg, 0.04638 mmol) was dissolved with stirring in 100 ⁇ l of pH 8.0 PBS containing 5 mM EDTA.
  • Pyridyl dithiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-NHS ester (Formula 104 where n is 80) (16.23 mg, 0.00464 mmol) dissolved in 100 ⁇ l of pH 7.0 PBS was added to the stirring solution of galactosamine. After 1 hour, the resulting pyridyl dithiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-N-acetylgalactosamine (Formula 106A) was ready to be used without further purification.
  • the purified OVA-Traut conjugate of Formula 103′ prepared in Example 1A was added directly to the stirring product of Formula 106A prepared in Example 1B. After 1 hour, the resulting product of Formula 1a was purified by passing the reaction mixture through a centrifugal size exclusion column. Characterization (UHPLC SEC, gel electrophoresis) confirmed product identity. (See FIG. 5 .)
  • poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-(pyridyl disulfide) (Formula 201) (20.0 mg, 0.0020 mmol) was solubilized in 50 ⁇ l of pH 8.0 PBS containing 5 mM EDTA. To this was added the purified OVA-Traut product from Example 2A followed by stirring for 1 hour. The resulting product of Formula 1b was purified by passing the reaction mixture through a centrifugal size exclusion column. Characterization (UHPLC SEC, gel electrophoresis) confirmed the identity of the product. (See FIG. 5 .)
  • OVA 5.0 mg, 0.000119048 mmol
  • 0.2 ml of pH 7.4 PBS 75 mg (0.00297619 mmol) of Poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-NHS (Formula 701) dissolved in 0.4 ml of pH 7.4 PBS.
  • the mixture was allowed to stir for 2 hours.
  • the mixture was then collected and dialyzed for 3 days against pH 7.4 PBS (30 kDa molecular weight cut off) to afford the product of Formula 1g.
  • OVA 3.0 mg, 0.0000714286 mmol
  • Dibenzocyclooctyne-PEG-(p-nitrophenyl carbonate) (Formula 801) 5.265 mg, 0.002142857 mmol
  • the excess dibenzocyclooctyne-PEG-(p-nitrophenyl carbonate) was removed using a centrifugal size exclusion column to afford the product of Formula 802′.
  • Poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-N3 (Formula 803 where p is 55, q is 4 and Z′′ is N-acetylgalactosamine) (33 mg, 0.002142857 mmol) was dissolved in 100 ⁇ l of pH 7.4 PBS and added to the product of Example 5A with stirring. After 1 hour, the resulting product of Formula 1 h was purified by centrifugal size exclusion chromatography.
  • OVA 5.0 mg, 0.00019 mmol
  • 1 mg of Taut's Reagent was dissolved in 100 ⁇ l of pH 7.0 PBS, and 16 ⁇ l (0.0019 mmol) of the Traut's Reagent solution so obtained was added to the stirred solution of OVA with continued stirring. After 1 hour, non-reacted Traut's Reagent was removed using a centrifugal size exclusion column to afford the product of Formula 103′.
  • Dibenzocyclooctyne-PEG-(pyridyl disulfide) (Formula 901 where n is 45) (6.0 mg, 0.00238 mmol) was dissolved in DMF and the resulting solution was added to the OVA solution obtained in Example 6A and stirred for 1 hour. The excess dibenzocyclooctyne-PEG-(pyridyl disulfide) was removed using centrifugal size exclusion chromatography to afford the product of Formula 902′′.
  • Poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-N3 (Formula 803 where p is 55, q is 4 and Z′′ is N-acetylgalactosamine) (36 mg, 0.00238 mmol) was dissolved in 150 ⁇ l of pH 7.4 PBS and added to the product of Example 6B with stirring. After 1 hour, the resulting product of Formula 1j was purified (excess p(GMA)-N3 removed) by centrifugal size exclusion chromatography. Characterization (UHPLC SEC, gel electrophoresis) confirmed the identity of the product.
  • Dibenzocyclooctyne-PEG-(pyridyl disulfide) (Formula 1001 where n is 80) (9.0 mg, 0.00238 mmol) was dissolved in DMF and the resulting solution was added to a purified OVA solution of Formula 103′ (where X′ is Ovalbumin and m is 2), for example prepared as described in Example 6A and stirred for 1 hour.
  • the excess dibenzocyclooctyne-PEG-(pyridyl disulfide) was removed using centrifugal size exclusion chromatography to afford the product of Formula 1002.
  • Poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-N3 (Formula 803 where p is 55, q is 4 and Z′′ is N-Acetylgalactosamine) (36 mg, 0.00238 mmol) was dissolved in 150 ⁇ l of pH 7.4 PBS and added to the product of Example 7A with stirring. After 1 hour, the resulting product of Formula 1 L was purified (excess poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-N3 removed) by centrifugal size exclusion chromatography. Characterization (UHPLC SEC, gel electrophoresis) confirmed the identity of the product.
  • phycoerythrin purchased from Pierce
  • 200 ⁇ l, 0.000004 mmol was added to 50 ⁇ l of pH 8.0 PBS containing 5 mM EDTA and stirred.
  • 1 mg of Taut's Reagent was dissolved in 100 ⁇ l of pH 7.0 PBS, and 2 ⁇ l (0.00013 mmol) of the Traut's Reagent solution so obtained was added to the stirred solution of PE with continued stirring. After 1 hour, excess Traut's Reagent was removed using a centrifugal size exclusion column to afford the product of Formula 103′.
  • galactosamine 7.0 mg, 0.03246 mmol
  • pH 8.0 PBS pH 8.0 PBS containing 5 mM EDTA
  • Pyridyl dithiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-NHS ester (Formula 104 where n is 80) (16.23 mg, 0.00464 mmol) dissolved in 50 ⁇ l of pH 7.0 PBS was added to the stirring solution of galactosamine. After 1 hour, the resulting product of Formula 106A was ready to be used without further purification.
  • Example 9A The purified PE-Traut conjugates prepared in Example 9A were added directly to the stirring product of Formula 106A prepared in Example 9B. After 1 hour, the resulting product of Formula 1a was purified by passing the reaction mixture through a centrifugal size exclusion column. Characterization (UHPLC SEC, gel electrophoresis) confirmed the identity of the product.
  • F1aA-PE-m 3 -n 80 was prepared, for example, as described in Example 9.
  • a 30 ⁇ g/100p 1 solution in sterile saline was prepared for injection.
  • LSECs sinusoidal endothelial cells
  • hepatocytes (1C
  • KC kupffer cells
  • APCs antigen-presenting cells
  • 10 6 OT-1 T cells were fluorecently labeled and adoptively transferred into 3 groups of CD 45.2 mice (5 per group) via tail vein injection.
  • the next day (i.e. Day 1) to each of the 3 groups of mice were administered, respectively, 10 ⁇ g of F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 80 , OVA or saline via tail vein injection.
  • the animals were sacrificed and the % of splenic proliferating OT-1 cells was determined via florescence activated cell sorting.
  • F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 8 does not Induce an OVA-Specific Antibody Response
  • mice were administered an i.v. injection of 100 ⁇ l of saline containing one of the following: 1.) 6 ⁇ g of OVA; 2.) 6 ⁇ g of F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 8 ; 3.) 30 ⁇ g of OVA; 4.) 30 ⁇ g of F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 8 , or 5.) saline alone. Each group contained 5 mice.
  • mice treated with 6 and 30 ⁇ g of OVA had increased OVA-specific antibody titers
  • mice treated with both 6 and 30 ⁇ g of F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 8 (“Gal-OVA” in FIG. 4 ) had blood titers similar to mice treated with saline (i.e. vehicle treated animals) ( FIG. 4 ).
  • mice treated with 6 and 30 ⁇ g of OVA had an average antibody titer of 3.5 and 2.5, respectively; whereas, mice treated with 6 and 30 ⁇ g of OVA had an average antibody titer of 0.75 and 0.25, respectively.
  • mice treated with the compounds from Examples 3A, 4A, 5B, 6C, 7B and 15G have OVA-specific antibody titers similar to mice treated with saline.
  • mice treated with the compounds from Examples 1E, 1G, 2C, 15I, 15L, 16B, 16D and 16F have antigen X-specific antibody titers similar to mice treated with saline.
  • mice that had different OVA-antibody blood titers each mouse had a titer from 0 to 4.5
  • mice were bled on day ⁇ 1 to establish an initial antibody titer and then subsequent bleeds were carried out after each injection of F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 8 on days 2, 6, 9, 13, and 16.
  • the antibody titer for each mouse was determined via ELISA.
  • the results from this study show that F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 8 is able to deplete serum antibody levels in mice. For example, one day after the first F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 8 injection (i.e.
  • mice with positive OVA-antibody titers experience a 5 to 100-fold decrease in serum antibody levels ( FIG. 5 ).
  • Our results show that although over the course of the 19 day experiment, antibody titers did increase for certain mice, the titer levels never reached the initial antibody titer measured on Day ⁇ 1 and subsequent doses of F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 8 were effective in reducing these transient increases in antibody titers.
  • F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 8 has the specificity to bind serum OVA-specific antibodies and the kinetics required to deplete OVA-specific serum antibodies.
  • Example 13B By following the procedure described in Example 13A and substituting F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 8 with the compounds of Formula 1 obtained, for example, as described in Examples 3A, 4A, 5B, 6C, 7B and 15G, it is shown that the compounds from Examples 3A, 4A, 5B, 6C, 7B and 15G have the specificity to bind serum OVA-specific antibodies and the kinetics required to deplete OVA-specific serum antibodies.
  • Example 13C By following the procedure described in Example 13A and substituting F1aA-OVA-m 4 -n 8 with the compounds of Formulae 1 obtained, for example, as described in Examples 1E, 1G, 2C, 10D, 15I, 15L, 16B, 16D and 16F, and substituting OVA with the antigens corresponding to X (or X′ or X′′), respectively, it is shown that the compounds from Examples 1E, 1G, 2C, 15I, 15L, 16B, 16D and 16F have the specificity to bind serum antigen X-specific antibodies and the kinetics required to deplete antigen X-specific serum antibodies.
  • N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine (Formula 1101 where R 3 is NHAc and R 4 is OH) (5g, 22.6 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of chloroethanol (200 ml) at room temperature. The solution was cooled to 4° C. and acetylchloride was added drop-wise to the solution. The solution was brought to room temperature and then heated to 70° C. After 4 hours, the unreacted choroethanol was removed under reduced pressure. 100 ml of ethanol was added to the crude product and the resulting solution was stirred in the presence of carbon for 2 hours. The solution was filtered, and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The corresponding product of Formula 1102, N-(2-(2-chloroethoxy)-4,5-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)acetamide, was used without further purification.
  • Ovalbumin (5 mg, 0.00012 mmol) was added to 100 ⁇ l of sodium phosphate buffer (pH 8.0) and stirred. To this solution was added 5 mg of the compound of Formula 1108 where n is 80. After 1 hour, the unreacted compound of Formula 1108 was removed from the solution via centrifugal size-exclusion chromatography. The resulting buffered solution containing the corresponding product of Formula 1109 was used in the next reaction without further purification.
  • Example 15F The solution prepared in Example 15F was added to 100 ⁇ l of sodium phosphate buffer (pH 8.0) which contained 10 mg of the product of Formula 1107 prepared in Example 15E. The reaction was allowed to stir for 2 hours and then the excess Formula 1107 was removed via centrifugal size exclusion chromatography to afford the corresponding isomeric product of Formula 1 m in solution, which was used in biological studies without further purification.
  • the R 3 substituent is shown in the name of the title compound as 2NHAc.
  • Example 15E By following the procedure described in Example 15A and substituting the N-acetyl-D-galactosamine with galactose, and following through to the procedure described in Example 15E except using an azide-modified uRAFT agent of Formula 1106 where q is 8, there is obtained the compound of Formula 1107 where where p is 30, q is 8, R 3 is OH, R 4 is OH and R 8 is CMP.
  • Recombinant human insulin (5 mg) was added to 100 ⁇ l of DMF containing 10 ⁇ l of triethylamine and stirred until the insulin became soluble.
  • 10 mg (0.0161 mmol) of a linker precursor of Formula 1201 where n is 1 was added to this solution.
  • 1.3 ml of tert-butyl methyl ether was added to isolate the corresponding product of Formula 1202, which was recovered as the precipitate.
  • Residual DMF and tert-butyl methyl ether were removed under reduced pressure. Characterization via liquid chromatography, mass spectroscopy and polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis confirmed the identity of the product.
  • the modified insulin product of Formula 1202 was used without further purification.
  • the product of Formula 1202 obtained in Example 16A was resuspended in 100 ⁇ l of DMF.
  • the polymer product of Formula 1107 obtained in Example 15E (10 mg) was added and the reaction was allowed to stir for 1 hour. After 1 hour, the reaction products were precipitated via the addition of dichloromethane (1.3 ml).
  • the product was filtered and the residual solvent was removed under reduced pressure.
  • the crude product was then resuspended in 500 ⁇ l of PBS, and the low molecular weight components were removed via centrifugal size exclusion chromatography to afford the corresponding isomeric product of Formula 1 n. Characterization via liquid chromatography, mass spectroscopy and polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis confirmed the identity of the product.
  • the modified insulin product of Formula 1202 was used without further purification.
  • Non-obese diabetic mice are susceptible to the spontaneous onset of autoimmune diabetes mellitus, which is the result of an autoimmune response to various pancreatic auto-antigens. Diabetes develops in NOD mice as a result of insulitis, characterized by the infiltration of various leukocytes into the pancreatic islets.
  • NOD mice are divided into control or test grops and treated, respectively, with weekly intravenous injections of a test composition (10 ⁇ g) or an inactive control such as saline. The injections continue for 18 consecutive weeks.
  • mice The blood glucose concentration of the mice is measured weekly. Mice that maintain a blood glucose concentration of less than 300 mg/ml during the experiment are considered non-diabetic.
  • pancreases of the mice are harvested and T cell infiltration in the pancreas is determined via immunohistochemistry as an assessment of insulitis. Tolerance induction is assessed by the depletion of auto-antigen specific CD8 T cells as compared to mice that are treated with saline and develop diabetes. The existence of auto-antigen specific CD8 T cells is determined via ELISpot assay.
  • compositions of Formula 1 where X is insulin show efficacy for treating diabetes mellitus.
  • compositions of Formula 1 where X is insulin show efficacy for treating diabetes mellitus.

Abstract

Glycotargeting therapeutics are useful in the treatment of transplant rejection, autoimmune disease, food allergy, and immune response against a therapeutic agent.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION
  • This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 16/723,757, filed Dec. 20, 2019, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 14/859,292, filed Sep. 19, 2015, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,946,079, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 14/627,297, filed Feb. 20, 2015, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,821,157, which claims the benefit of priority to U.S. Ser. No. 61/942,942 filed Feb. 21, 2014, the disclosures of each of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
    • FIELD OF THE DISCLOSURE
  • The field of the disclosure relates to pharmaceutically acceptable compositions that are useful in the treatment of transplant rejection, autoimmune disease, food allergy, and immune response against a therapeutic agent.
    • INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE OF MATERIAL IN ASCII TEXT FILE
  • This application incorporates by reference the material contained in the Sequence Listing XML file being submitted concurrently herewith: File name: ANOK002P1C2_ST26.xml; created Sep. 7, 2022, 38227 bytes in size.
    • BACKGROUND OF THE DISCLOSURE
  • Applications US 2012/0039989, US 2012/0178139 and WO 2013/121296 describe the targeting of antigens to erythrocytes to take advantage of the erythrocytes' role in antigen presentation for tolerization. Notwithstanding the positive results generated to date with this approach, the possibility of alternative approaches has remained of interest.
    • SUMMARY OF THE DISCLOSURE
  • An aspect of the disclosure provides a composition comprising a compound of Formula 1:
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00001
  • where:
      • m is an integer from about 1 to 100;
      • X comprises an antigen against which a patient develops an unwanted immune response, or a tolerogenic portion thereof; or
      • X comprises an antibody, antibody fragment or ligand that specifically binds a circulating protein or peptide or antibody, which circulating protein or peptide or antibody is causatively involved in transplant rejection, immune response against a therapeutic agent, autoimmune disease, hypersensitivity and/or allergy;
      • Y comprises a linker moiety; and
      • Z comprises a liver-targeting moiety.
  • Z can also comprise galactose, galactosamine, N-acetylgalactosamine, glucose, glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine, for example, conjugated at its C1, C2 or C6 to Y.
  • Y can be Y is selected from N-hydroxysuccinamidyl linkers, malaemide linkers, vinylsulfone linkers, pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol) linkers, pyridyl di-thiol linkers, n-nitrophenyl carbonate linkers, NHS-ester linkers, and nitrophenoxy poly(ethylene glycol)ester linkers.
  • Y can also comprise: an antibody, antibody fragment, peptide or other ligand that specifically binds X; a disulfanyl ethyl ester; a structure represented by one of Formulae Ya to Yp:
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00002
    Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00003
    Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00004
  • or has a portion represented by Formula Y′-CMP:
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00005
  • where: the left bracket “(” indicates the bond between X and Y; the right or bottom bracket and “)” indicates the bond between Y and Z; n is an integer from about 1 to 100; p is an integer from about 2 to 150; q is an integer from about 1 to 44; R8 is —CH2— or —CH2—CH2—C(CH3)(CN)—; R9 is a direct bond or —CH2—CH2—NH—C(O)—; and Y′ represents the remaining portion of Y.
  • In another aspect of the above, n is about 40 to 80, p is about 10 to 100, q is about 3 to 20, R8 is —CH2—CH2—C(CH3)(CN)—; and when R9 is —CH2—CH2—NH—C(O)—, Z is galactose or N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at its C1.
  • In still another aspect of the above, Y comprises Formula Ya, Formula Yb, Formula Yh, Formula Yi, Formula Yk, Formula Ym or Formula Yn, particularly Formula Ya, Formula Yb, Formula Ym or Formula Yn.
  • X can further comprise: a foreign transplant antigen against which transplant recipients develop an unwanted immune response; a foreign food, animal, plant or environmental antigen against which patients develop an unwanted immune response; a foreign therapeutic agent against which patients develop an unwanted immune response; or a synthetic self-antigen against the endogenous version of which patients develop an unwanted immune response, or a tolerogenic portion thereof.
  • The disclosure also pertains to a method of treatment for an unwanted immune response against an antigen by administering to a mammal in need of such treatment an effective amount of a composition comprising a compound of Formula 1 as discussed above. In such method the composition can be administered for clearance of a circulating protein or peptide or antibody that specifically binds to antigen moiety X, which circulating protein or peptide or antibody is causatively involved in transplant rejection, immune response against a therapeutic agent, autoimmune disease, hypersensitivity and/or allergy. The composition can be administered in an amount effective to reduce a concentration of the antibodies that are causatively involved in transplant rejection, immune response against a therapeutic agent, autoimmune disease, hypersensitivity and/or allergy in blood of the patient by at least 50% w/w, as measured at a time between about 12 to about 48 hours after the administration. The composition can administered for tolerization of a patient with respect to antigen moiety X.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIGS. 1A-1D are a series of graphs showing galactose conjugation. FIG. 1A depicts that F1aA-PE-m4-n80 (Gal-PE) preferentially targets OVA to sinusoidal endothelial cells (LSECs) of the liver. FIG. 1B depicts that F1aA-PE-m4-n80 (Gal-PE) preferentially targets OVA to Kupffer cells (KC) of the liver. FIG. 1C depicts that F1aA-PE-m4-n80 (Gal-PE) preferentially targets OVA to hepatocytes. FIG. 1D depicts that F1aA-PE-m4-n80 (Gal-PE) preferentially targets OVA to other antigen presenting cells (APCs) of the liver.
  • FIG. 2 is a graph showing proliferation of OTI CD8+ T cells in mice treated with F1aA-OVA-m4-n80 (Gal-OVA), OVA or saline (i.e. naïve).
  • FIGS. 3A-3B are a series of graphs depicting data related to marker expression on T cells. FIG. 3A shows the percentage of OT-1 CD8+ T cells presenting PD-1 in generations of proliferating T cells treated with saline, OVA or F1aA-OVA-m4-n80 (GAL-OVA). FIG. 3B show the percentage of OT-1 CD8+ T cells presenting Annexin-V in generations of proliferating T cells treated with saline, OVA or F1aA-OVA-m4-n80 (GAL-OVA).
  • FIG. 4 is a graph showing galactose conjugation [F1aA-OVA-m4-n80 (Gal-OVA)] decreases the immunogenicity of OVA as determined by OVA-specific antibody titers (shown in Ab titers log−1).
  • FIG. 5 shows that F1aA-OVA-m4-n80 (Gal-OVA) is able to deplete OVA-specific antibodies from the serum.
  • FIGS. 6A-6F depict data related to the migitation of the OVA-specific immune response. FIG. 6A shows the immune response in mice challenged with OVA and LPS. FIG. 6B shows the immune response in mice treated with OVA, while FIG. 6C shows the immune response in naïve mice. FIGS. 6D, 6E, and 6F (respectively) show that F1aA-OVA-m4-n80 (mGal-OVA; 6D), F1b-OVA-m1-n44-p34 (pGal-OVA; 6E), and N′-DOM-Gly3Ser-OVA-Gly3Ser-6×His-C′ (Dom-OVA; 6F) are able to mitigate the OVA-specific immune response in draining lymphnodes after intradermal challenge with OVA and the adjuvant LPS.
  • FIGS. 7A-7B shows the characterization of F1aA-OVA-m4-n80 and F1b-OVA-m1-n44-p34. FIG. 7A shows size-exclusion HPLC traces of F1aA-OVA-m4-n80 (open triangles), F1b-OVA-m1-n44-p34 (filled circles) and unconjugated OVA (solid line). Shift to the left represents an increase in molecular weight. FIG. 7B shows polyacrylamide gel demonstrating increased molecular weight after OVA conjugation: (1.) Unconjugated OVA, (2.) F1aA-OVA-m4-n80 and (3.) F1b-OVA-m1-n44-p34.
    •  DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • The two known asialoglycoprotein receptors (“ASGPRs”) are expressed on hepatocytes and liver sinusoidal endothelial cells (or “LSECs”). Other galactose/galactosamine/N-acetylgalactosamine receptors can be found in various forms on multiple cell types [e.g., dendritic cells, hepatocytes, LSECs, and Kupffer cells]. While the molecular and cellular targets of glucose, glucosamine and N-acetylglucosamine can be distinct from those of the corresponding galactose isomers, it has been found that the corresponding compounds of Formula 1 where Z is a galactosylating moiety are comparably effective. Dendritic cells are considered “professional antigen presenting cells,” because their primary function is to present antigens to the immune system for generating immune responses. Some cells within the liver are known to be able to present antigens, but the liver is more known to be involved in tolerogenesis. The liver is understood to be a tolerogenic organ. For example, lower incidences of rejection are reported in cases of multiple organ transplants when the liver is one of the organs transplanted. LSECs are much newer to the literature; consequently their role in tolerogenesis and/or moderation of inflammatory immune responses is not yet widely acknowledged or well understood. However, it is becoming clear that they also can play a significant role in the induction of antigen-specific tolerance.
  • One of the distinctive features of the erythrocyte surface is its glycosylation, i.e., the presence of significant numbers of glycosylated proteins. Indeed, the glycophorins (e.g., glycophorin A) have been employed as targets for erythrocyte binding. Glycophorins are proteins with many covalently attached sugar chains, the end terminus of which is sialic acid. As an erythrocyte ages and becomes ripe for clearance, the terminal sialic acid of its glycophorins tends to be lost, leaving N-acetylgalactosamine at the free end. N-acetylgalactosamine is a ligand selectively received by the ASGPR associated with hepatic cells, leading to binding of N-acetylgalactosamine-containing substances by hepatic cells and their subsequent uptake and processing in the liver.
  • Heretofore, it has been understood by those skilled in the art that glycosylation of a therapeutic agent in a manner that results in hepatic targeting should be avoided due to first-pass clearance by the liver resulting in poor circulation half-life of the therapeutic agent. By the same token, some monoclonal antibodies need to be specifically glycosylated at ASN297 for optimal binding to their Fc receptors. It has now surprisingly been found that galactosylation can be used in a manner that induces tolerogenesis.
  • The present disclosure provides certain therapeutic compositions that are targeted for delivery to (and for uptake by) the liver, particularly hepatocytes, LSECs, Kupffer cells and/or stellate cells, more particularly hepatocytes and/or LSECs, and even more particularly to specifically bind ASGPR. Liver-targeting facilitates two mechanisms of treatment: tolerization and clearance. Tolerization takes advantage of the liver's role in clearing apoptotic cells and processing their proteins to be recognized by the immune system as “self,” as well as the liver's role in sampling peripheral proteins for immune tolerance. Clearance takes advantage of the liver's role in blood purification by rapidly removing and breaking down toxins, polypeptides and the like. Targeting of these compositions to the liver is accomplished by a galactosylating moiety (e.g., galactose, galactosamine and N-acetylgalactosamine, particularly conjugated at C1, C2 or C6), by another liver-targeting moiety (e.g., a monoclonal antibody, or a fragment or an scFv thereof), or by de-sialylating a polypeptide for which such liver-targeting is desired. The galactosylating or other liver-targeting moiety can be chemically conjugated or recombinantly fused to an antigen, whereas desialylation exposes a galactose-like moiety on an antigen polypeptide. The antigen can be endogenous (a self-antigen) or exogenous (a foreign antigen), including but not limited to: a foreign transplant antigen against which transplant recipients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., transplant rejection), a foreign food, animal, plant or environmental antigen to which patients develop an unwanted immune (e.g., allergic or hypersensitivity) response, a therapeutic agent to which patients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., hypersensitivity and/or reduced therapeutic activity), a self-antigen to which patients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., autoimmune disease), or a tolerogenic portion (e.g., a fragment or an epitope) thereof; these compositions are useful for inducing tolerization to the antigen. Alternatively, the galactosylating or other liver-targeting moiety can be conjugated to an antibody, antibody fragment or ligand that specifically binds a circulating protein or peptide or antibody, which circulating protein or peptide or antibody is causatively involved in transplant rejection, immune response against a therapeutic agent, autoimmune disease, and/or allergy (as discussed above); these compositions are useful for clearing the circulating protein, peptide or antibody. Accordingly, the compositions of the present disclosure can be used for treating an unwanted immune response, e.g., transplant rejection, an immune response against a therapeutic agent, an autoimmune disease, and/or an allergy. Also provided are pharmaceutical compositions containing a therapeutically effective amount of a composition of the disclosure admixed with at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient. In another aspect, the disclosure provides methods for the treatment of an unwanted immune response, such as transplant rejection, response against a therapeutic agent, autoimmune disease or allergy.
    • Definitions
  • As used in the present specification, the following words and phrases are generally intended to have the meanings as set forth below, except to the extent that the context in which they are used indicates otherwise.
  • The singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” include plural referents, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.
  • The term “about” when used in connection with a numerical value is meant to encompass numerical values within a range typically having a lower limit that is, e.g., 5-10% smaller than the indicated numerical value and having an upper limit that is, e.g., 5-10% larger than the indicated numerical value.
  • An “antigen” is any substance that serves as a target for the receptors of an adaptive immune response, such as the T cell receptor, B cell receptor or an antibody. An antigen may originate from within the body (“self,” “auto” or “endogenous”). An antigen may originate from outside the body (“non-self,” “foreign” or “exogenous”), having entered, for example, by inhalation, ingestion, injection, or transplantation. Foreign antigens include, but are not limited to, food antigens, animal antigens, plant antigens, environmental antigens, therapeutic agents, as well as antigens present in an allograft transplant.
  • An “antigen-binding molecule” as used herein relates to molecules, in particular to proteins such as immunoglobulin molecules, which contain antibody variable regions providing a specific binding to an epitope. The antibody variable region can be present in, for example, a complete antibody, an antibody fragment, and a recombinant derivative of an antibody or antibody fragment. The term “antigen-binding fragment” of an antibody (or “binding portion”), as used herein, refers to one or more fragments of an antibody that retain the ability to specifically bind a target sequence. Antigen-binding fragments containing antibody variable regions include (without limitation) “Fv”, “Fab”, and “F(ab′)2” regions, “single domain antibodies (sdAb)”, “nanobodies”, “single chain Fv (scFv)” fragments, “tandem scFvs” (VHA-VLA-VHB-VLB), “diabodies”, “triabodies” or “tribodies”, “single-chain diabodies (scDb)”, and “bi-specific T-cell engagers (BiTEs)”.
  • A “chemical modification” refers to a change in the naturally-occurring chemical structure of one or more amino acids of a polypeptide. Such modifications can be made to a side chain or a terminus, e.g., changing the amino-terminus or carboxyl terminus. In some embodiments, the modifications are useful for creating chemical groups that can conveniently be used to link the polypeptides to other materials, or to attach a therapeutic agent.
  • The term “comprising”, which is synonymous with “including,” “containing,” or “characterized by,” is inclusive or open-ended and does not exclude additional, unrecited elements or method steps. The phrase “consisting of” excludes any element, step, or ingredient not specified. The phrase “consisting essentially of” limits the scope of described subject matter to the specified materials or steps and those that do not materially affect its basic and novel characteristics.
  • “Conservative changes” can generally be made to an amino acid sequence without altering activity. These changes are termed “conservative substitutions” or mutations; that is, an amino acid belonging to a grouping of amino acids having a particular size or characteristic can be substituted for another amino acid. Substitutes for an amino acid sequence can be selected from other members of the class to which the amino acid belongs. For example, the nonpolar (hydrophobic) amino acids include alanine, leucine, isoleucine, valine, proline, phenylalanine, tryptophan, methionine, and tyrosine. The polar neutral amino acids include glycine, serine, threonine, cysteine, tyrosine, asparagine and glutamine. The positively charged (basic) amino acids include arginine, lysine and histidine. The negatively charged (acidic) amino acids include aspartic acid and glutamic acid. Such substitutions are not expected to substantially affect apparent molecular weight as determined by polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis or isoelectric point. Conservative substitutions also include substituting optical isomers of the sequences for other optical isomers, specifically D amino acids for L amino acids for one or more residues of a sequence. Moreover, all of the amino acids in a sequence can undergo a D to L isomer substitution. Exemplary conservative substitutions include, but are not limited to, Lys for Arg and vice versa to maintain a positive charge; Glu for Asp and vice versa to maintain a negative charge; Ser for Thr so that a free —OH is maintained; and Gln for Asn to maintain a free —NH2. Yet another type of conservative substitution constutes the case where amino acids with desired chemical reactivities are introduced to impart reactive sites for chemical conjugation reactions, if the need for chemical derivativization arises. Such amino acids include but are not limited to Cys (to insert a sulfhydryl group), Lys (to insert a primary amine), Asp and Glu (to insert a carboxylic acid group), or specialized noncanonical amino acids containing ketone, azide, alkyne, alkene, and tetrazine side-chains. Conservative substitutions or additions of free —NH2 or —SH bearing amino acids can be particularly advantageous for chemical conjugation with the linkers and galactosylating moieties of Formula 1. Moreover, point mutations, deletions, and insertions of the polypeptide sequences or corresponding nucleic acid sequences can in some cases be made without a loss of function of the polypeptide or nucleic acid fragment. Substitutions can include, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 or more residues. A variant usable in the present invention may exhibit a total number of up to 200 (up to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, or 200) changes in the amino acid sequence (i.e. exchanges, insertions, deletions, N-terminal truncations, and/or C-terminal truncations). The amino acid residues described herein employ either the single letter amino acid designator or the three-letter abbreviation in keeping with the standard polypeptide nomenclature, J. Biol. Chem., (1969), 243, 3552-3559. All amino acid residue sequences are represented herein by formulae with left and right orientation in the conventional direction of amino-terminus to carboxy-terminus.
  • The terms “effective amount” or “therapeutically effective amount” refer to that amount of a composition of the disclosure that is sufficient to effect treatment, as defined below, when administered to a mammal in need of such treatment. This amount will vary depending upon the subject and disease condition being treated, the weight and age of the subject, the severity of the disease condition, the particular composition of the disclosure chosen, the dosing regimen to be followed, timing of administration, manner of administration and the like, all of which can readily be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • An “epitope”, also known as antigenic determinant, is the segment of a macromolecule, e.g. a protein, which is recognized by the adaptive immune system, such as by antibodies, B cells, or T cells. An epitope is that part or segment of a macromolecule capable capable of binding to an antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof. In this context, the term “binding” in particular relates to a specific binding. In the context of the present invention it is preferred that the term “epitope” refers to the segment of protein or polyprotein that is recognized by the immune system.
  • The term galactose is well known in the art and refers to a monosaccharide sugar that exists both in open-chain form and in cyclic form, having D- and L-isomers. In the cyclic form there are two anomers, namely alpha and beta. In the alpha form, the C1 alcohol group is in the axial position, whereas in the beta form, the C1 alcohol group is in the equatorial position. In particular, “galactose” refers to the cyclic six-membered pyranose, more in particular the D-isomer and even more particularly the alpha-D-form (α-D-galactopyranose). Glucose is an isomer of galactose. The structure and numbering of galactose and glucose are illustrated below.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00006
  • The term “galactosylating moiety” refers to a particular type of liver-targeting moiety. Galactosylating moieties include, but are not limited to a galactose, galactosamine and/or N-acetylgalactosamine residue. A “glucosylating moiety” refers to another particular type of liver-targeting moiety and includes glucose, glucosamine and/or N-acetylglucosamine.
  • The term “liver-targeting moiety”, refers to moieties having the ability to direct, e.g., a polypeptide, to the liver. The liver comprises different cell types, including but not limited to hepatocytes, sinusoidal epithelial cells, Kupffer cells, stellate cells, and/or dendritic cells. Typically, a liver-targeting moiety directs a polypeptide to one or more of these cells. On the surface of the respective liver cells, receptors are present which recognize and specifically bind the liver-targeting moiety. Liver-targeting can be achieved by chemical conjugation of an antigen or ligand to a galactosylating or glucosylating moiety, desialylation of an antigen or ligand to expose underlying galactosyl or glucosyl moieties, or specific binding of an endogenous antibody to an antigen or ligand, where the antigen or ligand is: desilylated to expose underlying galactosyl or glucosyl moieties, conjugated to a galactosylating or a glucosylating moiety. Naturally occurring desilylated proteins are not encompassed within the scope of the present disclosure.
  • The “numerical values” and “ranges” provided for the various substituents are intended to encompass all integers within the recited range. For example, when defining n as an integer representing a mixture including from about 1 to 100, particularly about 8 to 90 and more particularly about 40 to 80 ethylene glycol groups, where the mixture typically encompasses the integer specified as n±about 10% (or for smaller integers from 1 to about 25, ±3), it should be understood that n can be an integer from about 1 to 100 (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 25, 30, 34, 35, 37, 40, 41, 45, 50, 54, 55, 59, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 82, 83, 85, 88, 90, 95, 99, 100, 105 or 110) and that the disclosed mixture encompasses ranges such as 1-4, 2-4, 2-6, 3-8, 7-13, 6-14, 18-23, 26-30, 42-50, 46-57, 60-78, 85-90, 90-110 and 107-113 ethylene glycol groups. The combined terms “about” and “±10%” or “±3” should be understood to disclose and provide specific support for equivalent ranges wherever used.
  • The term “optional” or “optionally” means that the subsequently described event or circumstance may or may not occur, and that the description includes instances where said event or circumstance occurs and instances in which it does not.
  • A peptide that specifically binds a particular target is referred to as a “ligand” for that target.
  • A “polypeptide” is a term that refers to a chain of amino acid residues, regardless of post-translational modification (e.g., phosphorylation or glycosylation) and/or complexation with additional polypeptides, and/or synthesis into multisubunit complexes with nucleic acids and/or carbohydrates, or other molecules. Proteoglycans therefore also are referred to herein as polypeptides. A long polypeptide (having over about 50 amino acids) is referred to as a “protein.” A short polypeptide (having fewer than about 50 amino acids) is referred to as a “peptide.” Depending upon size, amino acid composition and three dimensional structure, certain polypeptides can be referred to as an an “antigen-binding molecule,” “antibody,” an “antibody fragment” or a “ligand.” Polypeptides can be produced by a number of methods, many of which are well known in the art. For example, polypeptides can be obtained by extraction (e.g., from isolated cells), by expression of a recombinant nucleic acid encoding the polypeptide, or by chemical synthesis. Polypeptides can be produced by, for example, recombinant technology, and expression vectors encoding the polypeptide introduced into host cells (e.g., by transformation or transfection) for expression of the encoded polypeptide
  • As used herein, “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” or “pharmaceutically acceptable excipient” includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents and the like. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active ingredient, its use in the therapeutic compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active ingredients can also be incorporated into the compositions.
  • The term “purified” as used herein with reference to a polypeptide refers to a polypeptide that has been chemically synthesized and is thus substantially uncontaminated by other polypeptides, or has been separated or isolated from most other cellular components by which it is naturally accompanied (e.g., other cellular proteins, polynucleotides, or cellular components). An example of a purified polypeptide is one that is at least 70%, by dry weight, free from the proteins and naturally occurring organic molecules with which it naturally associates. A preparation of a purified polypeptide therefore can be, for example, at least 80%, at least 90%, or at least 99%, by dry weight, the polypeptide. Polypeptides also can be engineered to contain a tag sequence (e.g., a polyhistidine tag, a myc tag, a FLAG® tag, or other affinity tag) that facilitates purification or marking (e.g., capture onto an affinity matrix, visualization under a microscope). Thus a purified composition that comprises a polypeptide refers to a purified polypeptide unless otherwise indicated. The term “isolated” indicates that the polypeptides or nucleic acids of the disclosure are not in their natural environment. Isolated products of the disclosure can thus be contained in a culture supernatant, partially enriched, produced from heterologous sources, cloned in a vector or formulated with a vehicle, etc.
  • The term “sequence identity” is used with regard to polypeptide sequence comparisons. This expression in particular refers to a percentage of sequence identity, for example at least 80%, at least 81%, at least 82%, at least 83%, at least 84%, at least 85%, at least 86%, at least 87%, at least 88%, at least 89%, at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, or at least 99% to the respective reference polypeptide or to the respective reference polynucleotide. Particularly, the polypeptide in question and the reference polypeptide exhibit the indicated sequence identity over a continuous stretch of 20, 30, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 or more amino acids or over the entire length of the reference polypeptide.
  • “Specific binding,” as that term is commonly used in the biological arts, refers to a molecule that binds to a target with a relatively high affinity as compared to non-target tissues, and generally involves a plurality of non-covalent interactions, such as electrostatic interactions, van der Waals interactions, hydrogen bonding, and the like. Specific binding interactions characterize antibody-antigen binding, enzyme-substrate binding, and certain protein-receptor interactions; while such molecules might bind tissues besides their specific targets from time to time, to the extent that such non-target binding is inconsequential, the high-affinity binding pair can still fall within the definition of specific binding.
  • The term “treatment” or “treating” means any treatment of a disease or disorder in a mammal, including:
      • preventing or protecting against the disease or disorder, that is, causing the clinical symptoms not to develop;
      • inhibiting the disease or disorder, that is, arresting or suppressing the development of clinical symptoms; and/or
      • relieving the disease or disorder, that is, causing the regression of clinical symptoms.
  • The term “unwanted immune response” refers to a reaction by the immune system of a subject, which in the given situation is not desirable. The reaction of the immune system is unwanted if such reaction does not lead to the prevention, reduction, or healing of a disease or disorder but instead causes, enhances or worsens a disorder or disease. Typically, a reaction of the immune system causes, enhances or worsens a disease if it is directed against an inappropriate target. Exemplified, an unwanted immune response includes but is not limited to transplant rejection, immune response against a therapeutic agent, autoimmune disease, and allergy or hypersensitivity.
  • The term “variant” is to be understood as a protein which differs in comparison to the protein from which it is derived by one or more changes in its length, sequence, or structure. The polypeptide from which a protein variant is derived is also known as the parent polypeptide or polynucleotide. The term “variant” comprises “fragments” or “derivatives” of the parent molecule. Typically, “fragments” are smaller in length or size than the parent molecule, whilst “derivatives” exhibit one or more differences in their sequence or structure in comparison to the parent molecule. Also encompassed modified molecules such as but not limited to post-translationally modified proteins (e.g. glycosylated, phosphorylated, ubiquitinated, palmitoylated, or proteolytically cleaved proteins) and modified nucleic acids such as methylated DNA. Also mixtures of different molecules such as but not limited to RNA-DNA hybrids, are encompassed by the term “variant”. Naturally occurring and artificially constructed variants are to be understood to be encompassed by the term “variant” as used herein. Further, the variants usable in the present invention may also be derived from homologs, orthologs, or paralogs of the parent molecule or from artificially constructed variant, provided that the variant exhibits at least one biological activity of the parent molecule, i.e. is functionally active. A variant can be characterized by a certain degree of sequence identity to the parent polypeptide from which it is derived. More precisely, a protein variant in the context of the present disclosure may exhibit at least 80% sequence identity to its parent polypeptide. Preferably, the sequence identity of protein variants is over a continuous stretch of 20, 30, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 or more amino acids.
  • Compositions
  • One aspect of the present disclosure relates to compositions, pharmaceutical formulations, and methods of treatment employing such compositions, as represented by Formula 1:
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00007
  • where:
      • m is an integer from about 1 to 100, particularly from about 1 to 20, and most particularly 1 to about 10;
      • X is an antigen moiety, particularly a foreign antigen or self-antigen against which a patient develops an unwanted immune response, or a tolerogenic portion (e.g., a fragment or an epitope) of such an antigen moiety;
      • Y is a linker moiety or a direct bond, or an antibody, antibody fragment, peptide or other ligand that specifically binds X; and
      • Z is a liver-targeting moiety, in particular galactosylating or a glucosylating moiety.
        The value for m in Formula 1 will depend upon the nature of X, in that each antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand will have an individual number and density of sites (predominantly the N-terminal amine, lysine residues and cysteine residues) to which a linker or galactosylating moiety can be bound. Antigens having a limited number of such sites can be derivatized, for example, at the N or C terminus, by adding lysine or cysteine residues (optionally via a cleavable linker, particularly a linker having an immunoproteosome cleavage site). Generally, it is preferred to provide an adequate degree of galactosylation in compositions of Formula 1 so as to facilitate uptake by liver cells. Pharmaceutical formulations and methods of the disclosure can employ a cocktail of compositions of Formula 1, respectively bearing different X moieties (e.g., several epitopes associated with a particular unwanted immune response).
  • The compositions of Formula 1 include the sub-genuses where X is a foreign transplant antigen against which transplant recipients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., transplant rejection), a foreign food, animal, plant or environmental antigen against which patients develop an unwanted immune (e.g., allergic or hypersensitivity) response, a foreign therapeutic agent against which patients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., hypersensitivity and/or reduced therapeutic activity), or a self-antigen against which patients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., autoimmune disease); where Y is a linker of Formulae Ya through Yp; and/or where Z is galactose, galactosamine, N-acetylgalactosamine, glucose, glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine as illustrated by Formulae 1a through 1p as described below with reference to the Reaction Schemes.
  • Alternatively, in the compositions of Formula 1, X can be an antibody, antibody fragment or ligand that specifically binds a circulating protein or peptide or antibody, which circulating protein or peptide or antibody is causatively involved in transplant rejection, immune response against a therapeutic agent, autoimmune disease, hypersensitivity and/or allergy.
  • Antigens
  • The antigen employed as X in the compositions of Formula 1 can be a protein or a peptide, e.g. the antigen may be a complete or partial therapeutic agent, a full-length transplant protein or peptide thereof, a full-length autoantigen or peptide thereof, a full-length allergen or peptide thereof, and/or a nucleic acid, or a mimetic of an aforementioned antigen.
  • Antigens employed in the practice of the present disclosure can be one or more of the following:
      • Therapeutic agents that are proteins, peptides, antibodies and antibody-like molecules, including antibody fragments and fusion proteins with antibodies and antibody fragments. These include human, non-human (such as mouse) and non-natural (i.e., engineered) proteins, antibodies, chimeric antibodies, humanized antibodies, and non-antibody binding scaffolds, such as fibronectins, DARPins, knottins, and the like.
      • Human allograft transplantation antigens against which transplant recipients develop an unwanted immune response.
      • Self-antigens that cause an unwanted, autoimmune response. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that while self-antigens are of an endogenous origin in an autoimmune disease patient, the polypeptides employed in the disclosed compositions are typically synthesized exogenously (as opposed to being purified and concentrated from a source of origin).
      • Foreign antigens, such as food, animal, plant and environmental antigens, against which a patient experiences an unwanted immune response. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that while a therapeutic protein can also be considered a foreign antigen due to its exogenous origin, for purposes of clarity in the description of the present disclosure such therapeutics are described as a separate group. Similarly, a plant or an animal antigen can be eaten and considered a food antigen, and an environmental antigen may originate from a plant. They are, however, all foreign antigens. In the interest of simplicity no attempt will be made to describe distinguish and define all of such potentially overlapping groups, as those skilled in the art can appreciate the antigens that can be employed in the compositions of the disclosure, particularly in light of the detailed description and examples.
        The antigen can be a complete protein, a portion of a complete protein, a peptide, or the like, and can be derivatized (as discussed above) for attachment to a linker and/or galactosylating moiety, can be a variant and/or can contain conservative substitutions, particularly maintaining sequence identity, and/or can be desialylated.
  • In the embodiments where the antigen is a therapeutic protein, peptide, antibody or antibody-like molecule, specific antigens can be selected from: Abatacept, Abciximab, Adalimumab, Adenosine deaminase, Ado-trastuzumab emtansine, Agalsidase alfa, Agalsidase beta, Aldeslukin, Alglucerase, Alglucosidase alfa, α-1-proteinase inhibitor, Anakinra, Anistreplase (anisoylated plasminogen streptokinase activator complex), Antithrombin III, Antithymocyte globulin, Ateplase, Bevacizumab, Bivalirudin, Botulinum toxin type A, Botulinum toxin type B, C1-esterase inhibitor, Canakinumab, Carboxypeptidase G2 (Glucarpidase and Voraxaze), Certolizumab pegol, Cetuximab, Collagenase, Crotalidae immune Fab, Darbepoetin-α, Denosumab, Digoxin immune Fab, Dornase alfa, Eculizumab, Etanercept, Factor Vila, Factor VIII, Factor IX, Factor XI, Factor XIII, Fibrinogen, Filgrastim, Galsulfase, Golimumab, Histrelin acetate, Hyaluronidase, Idursulphase, Imiglucerase, Infliximab, Insulin [including recombinant human insulin (“rHu insulin”) and bovine insulin], Interferon-α2a, Interferon-α2b, Interferon-β1a, Interferon-β1 b, Interferon-γ1 b, Ipilimumab, L-arginase, L-asparaginase, L-methionase, Lactase, Laronidase, Lepirudin/hirudin, Mecasermin, Mecasermin rinfabate, Methoxy Natalizumab, Octreotide, Ofatumumab, Oprelvekin, Pancreatic amylase, Pancreatic lipase, Papain, Peg-asparaginase, Peg-doxorubicin HCl, PEG-epoetin-β, Pegfilgrastim, Peg-Interferon-α2a, Peg-Interferon-α2b, Pegloticase, Pegvisomant, Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase (PAL), Protein C, Rasburicase (uricase), Sacrosidase, Salmon calcitonin, Sargramostim, Streptokinase, Tenecteplase, Teriparatide, Tocilizumab (atlizumab), Trastuzumab, Type 1 alpha-interferon, Ustekinumab, vW factor. The therapeutic protein can be obtained from natural sources (e.g., concentrated and purified) or synthesized, e.g., recombinantly, and includes antibody therapeutics that are typically IgG monoclonal or fragments or fusions.
  • Particular therapeutic protein, peptide, antibody or antibody-like molecules include Abciximab, Adalimumab, Agalsidase alfa, Agalsidase beta, Aldeslukin, Alglucosidase alfa, Factor VIII, Factor IX, Infliximab, Insulin (including rHu Insulin), L-asparaginase, Laronidase, Natalizumab, Octreotide, Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase (PAL), or Rasburicase (uricase) and generally IgG monoclonal antibodies in their varying formats.
  • Another particular group includes the hemostatic agents (Factor VIII and IX), Insulin (including rHu Insulin), and the non-human therapeutics uricase, PAL and asparaginase.
  • Unwanted immune response in hematology and transplant includes autoimmune aplastic anemia, transplant rejection (generally), and Graft vs. Host Disease (bone marrow transplant rejection). In the embodiments where the antigen is a human allograft transplantation antigen, specific sequences can be selected from: subunits of the various MHC class I and MHC class II haplotype proteins (for example, donor/recipient differences identified in tissue cross-matching), and single-amino-acid polymorphisms on minor blood group antigens including RhCE, Kell, Kidd, Duffy and Ss. Such compositions can be prepared individually for a given donor/recipient pair.
  • In the embodiments where the antigen is a self-antigen, specific antigens (and the autoimmune disease with which they are associated) can be selected from:
      • In type 1 diabetes mellitus, several main antigens have been identified: insulin, proinsulin, preproinsulin, glutamic acid decarboxylase-65 (GAD-65 or glutamate decarboxylase 2), GAD-67, glucose-6 phosphatase 2 (IGRP or islet-specific glucose 6 phosphatase catalytic subunit related protein), insulinoma-associated protein 2 (IA-2), and insulinoma-associated protein 2β (IA-2β); other antigens include ICA69, ICA12 (SOX-13), carboxypeptidase H, Imogen 38, GLIMA 38, chromogranin-A, HSP-60, caboxypeptidase E, peripherin, glucose transporter 2, hepatocarcinoma-intestine-pancreas/pancreatic associated protein, S100p, glial fibrillary acidic protein, regenerating gene II, pancreatic duodenal homeobox 1, dystrophia myotonica kinase, islet-specific glucose-6-phosphatase catalytic subunit-related protein, and SST G-protein coupled receptors 1-5. It should be noted that insulin is an example of an antigen that can be characterized both as a self-antigen and a therapeutic protein antigen. For example, rHu Insulin and bovine insulin are therapeutic protein antigens (that are the subject of unwanted immune attack), whereas endogenous human insulin is a self-antigen (that is the subject of an unwanted immune attack). Because endogenous human insulin is not available to be employed in a pharmaceutical composition a recombinant form is employed in the compositions of the disclosure.
        • Human insulin, including an exogenously obtained form useful in the compositions of the disclosure, has the following sequence (UNIPROT P01308):
  • (SEQ ID NO: 5)
    MALWMRLLPL LALLALWGPD PAAAFVNQHL CGSHLVEALY
    LVCGERGFFY TPKTRREAED LQVGQVELGG GPGAGSLQPL
    ALEGSLQKRG IVEQCCTSIC SLYQLENYCN.
        • GAD-65, including an exogenously obtained form useful in the compositions of the disclosure, has the following sequence (UNIPROT Q05329):
  • (SEQ ID NO: 6)
    MASPGSGFWS FGSEDGSGDS ENPGTARAWC QVAQKFTGGI
    GNKLCALLYG DAEKPAESGG SQPPRAAARK AACACDQKPC
    SCSKVDVNYA FLHATDLLPA CDGERPTLAF LQDVMNILLQ
    YVVKSFDRST KVIDFHYPNE LLQEYNWELA DQPQNLEEIL
    MHCQTTLKYA IKTGHPRYFN QLSTGLDMVG LAADWLTSTA
    NTNMFTYEIA PVFVLLEYVT LKKMREIIGW PGGSGDGIFS
    PGGAISNMYA MMIARFKMFP EVKEKGMAAL PRLIAFTSEH
    SHFSLKKGAA ALGIGTDSVI LIKCDERGKM IPSDLERRIL
    EAKQKGFVPF LVSATAGTTV YGAFDPLLAV ADICKKYKIW
    MHVDAAWGGG LLMSRKHKWK LSGVERANSV TWNPHKMMGV
    PLQCSALLVR EEGLMQNGNQ MHASYLFQQD KHYDLSYDTG
    DKALQCGRHV DVFKLWLMWR AKGTTGFEAH VDKCLELAEY
    LYNIIKNREG YEMVFDGKPQ HTNVCFWYIP PSLRTLEDNE
    ERMSRLSKVA PVIKARMMEY GTTMVSYQPL GDKVNFFRMV
    ISNPAATHQD IDFLIEEIER LGQDL.
        • IGRP, including an exogenously obtained form useful in the compositions of the disclosure, has the following sequence (UNIPROT QN9QR9):
  • (SEQ ID NO: 7)
    MDFLHRNGVLIIQHLQKDYRAYYTFLNFMSNVGDP
    RNIFFIYFPLCFQFNQTVGTKMIWVAVIGDWLNLI
    FKWILFGHRPYWWVQETQIYPNHSSPCLEQFPTTC
    ETGPGSPSGHAMGASCVWYVMVTAALSHTVCGMDK
    FSITLHRLTWSFLWSVFWLIQISVCISRVFIATHF
    PHQVILGVIGGMLVAEAFEHTPGIQTASLGTYLKT
    NLFLFLFAVGFYLLLRVLNIDLLWSVPIAKKWCAN
    PDWIHIDTTPFAGLVRNLGVLFGLGFAINSEMFLL
    SCRGGNNYTLSFRLLCALTSLTILQLYHFLQIPTH
    EEHLFYVLSFCKSASIPLTVVAFIPYSVHMLMKQS
    GKKSQ.
      • In autoimmune diseases of the thyroid, including Hashimoto's thyroiditis and Graves' disease, main antigens include thyroglobulin (TG), thyroid peroxidase (TPO) and thyrotropin receptor (TSHR); other antigens include sodium iodine symporter (NIS) and megalin. In thyroid-associated ophthalmopathy and dermopathy, in addition to thyroid autoantigens including TSHR, an antigen is insulin-like growth factor 1 receptor. In hypoparathyroidism, a main antigen is calcium sensitive receptor.
      • In Addison's Disease, main antigens include 21-hydroxylase, 17α-hydroxylase, and P450 side chain cleavage enzyme (P450scc); other antigens include ACTH receptor, P450c21 and P450c17.
      • In premature ovarian failure, main antigens include FSH receptor and α-enolase.
      • In autoimmune hypophysitis, or pituitary autoimmune disease, main antigens include pituitary gland-specific protein factor (PGSF) 1a and 2; another antigen is type 2 iodothyronine deiodinase.
      • In multiple sclerosis, main antigens include myelin basic protein (“MBP”), myelin oligodendrocyte glycoprotein (“MOG”) and myelin proteolipid protein (“PLP”).
        • MBP, including an exogenously obtained form useful in the compositions of the disclosure, has the following sequence (UNIPROT P02686):
  • (SEQ ID NO: 8)
    MGNHAGKRELNAEKASTNSETNRGESEKKRNLGEL
    SRTTSEDNEVFGEADANQNNGTSSQDTAVTDSKRT
    ADPKNAWQDAHPADPGSRPHLIRLFSRDAPGREDN
    TFKDRPSESDELQTIQEDSAATSESLDVMASQKRP
    SQRHGSKYLATASTMDHARHGFLPRHRDTGILDSI
    GRFFGGDRGAPKRGSGKDSHHPARTAHYGSLPQKS
    HGRTQDENPVVHFFKNIVTPRTPPPSQGKGRGLSL
    SRFSWGAEGQRPGFGYGGRASDYKSAHKGFKGVDA
    QGTLSKIFKLGGRDSRSGSPMARR.
        • MOG, including an exogenously obtained form useful in the compositions of the disclosure, has the following sequence (UNIPROT Q16653):
  • (SEQ ID NO: 9)
    MASLSRPSLPSCLCSFLLLLLLQVSSSYAGQFRVI
    GPRHPIRALVGDEVELPCRISPGKNATGMEVGWYR
    PPFSRVVHLYRNGKDQDGDQAPEYRGRTELLKDAI
    GEGKVTLRIRNVRFSDEGGFTCFFRDHSYQEEAAM
    ELKVEDPFYWVSPGVLVLLAVLPVLLLQITVGLIF
    LCLQYRLRGKLRAEIENLHRTFDPHFLRVPCWKIT
    LFVIVPVLGPLVALIICYNWLHRRLAGQFLEELRN
    PF. 
        • PLP, including an exogenously obtained form useful in the compositions of the disclosure, has the following sequence (UNIPROT P60201):
  • (SEQ ID NO: 10)
    MGLLECCARCLVGAPFASLVATGLCFFGVALFCGC
    GHEALTGTEKLIETYFSKNYQDYEYLINVIHAFQY
    VIYGTASFFFLYGALLLAEGFYTTGAVRQIFGDYK
    TTICGKGLSATVTGGQKGRGSRGQHQAHSLERVCH
    CLGKWLGHPDKFVGITYALTVVWLLVFACSAVPVY
    IYFNTWTTCQSIAFPSKTSASIGSLCADARMYGVL
    PWNAFPGKVCGSNLLSICKTAEFQMTFHLFIAAFV
    GAAATLVSLLTFMIAATYNFAVLKLMGRGTKF.
        • Peptides/epitopes useful in the compositions of the disclosure for treating multiple sclerosis include some or all of the following sequences, individually in a composition of Formula 1 or together in a cocktail of compositions of Formula 1:
  • MBP13-32:
    (SEQ ID NO: 11)
    KYLATASTMDHARHGFLPRH;
    MBP83-99:
    (SEQ ID NO: 12)
    ENPWHFFKNIVTPRTP;
    MBP111-129:
    (SEQ ID NO: 13)
    LSRFSWGAEGQRPGFGYGG;
    MBP146-170:
    (SEQ ID NO: 14)
    AQGTLSKIFKLGGRDSRSGSPMARR;
    MOG1-20:
    (SEQ ID NO: 15)
    GQFRVIGPRHPIRALVGDEV;
    MOG35-55:
    (SEQ ID NO: 16)
    MEVGWYRPPFSRWHLYRNGK;
    and
    PLP139-154:
    (SEQ ID NO: 17)
    HCLGKWLGHPDKFVGI.
      • In rheumatoid arthritis, main antigens include collagen II, immunoglobulin binding protein, the fragment crystallizable region of immunoglobulin G, double-stranded DNA, and the natural and cirtullinated forms of proteins implicated in rheumatoid arthritis pathology, including fibrin/fibrinogen, vimentin, collagen I and II, and alpha-enolase.
      • In autoimmune gastritis, a main antigen is H+,K+-ATPase.
      • In pernicious angemis, a main antigen is intrinsic factor.
      • In celiac disease, main antigens are tissue transglutaminase and the natural and deamidated forms of gluten or gluten-like proteins, such as alpha-, gamma-, and omega-gliadin, glutenin, hordein, secalin, and avenin. Those skilled in the art will appreciate, for example, that while the main antigen of celiac disease is alpha gliadin, alpha gliadin turns more immunogenic in the body through deamidation by tissue glutaminase converting alpha gliadin's glutamines to glutamic acid. Thus, while alpha gliadin is originally a foreign food antigen, once it has been modified in the body to become more immunogenic it can be characterized as a self-antigen.
      • In vitiligo, a main antigen is tyrosinase, and tyrosinase related protein 1 and 2.
        • MART1, Melanoma antigen recognized by T cells 1, Melan-A, including an exogenously obtained form useful in the compositions of the disclosure, has the following sequence (UNIPROT Q16655):
  • (SEQ ID NO: 18)
    MPREDAHFIYGYPKKGHGHSYTTAEEAAGIGILTV
    ILGVLLLIGCWYCRRRNGYRALMDKSLHVGTQCAL
    TRRCPQEGFDHRDSKVSLQEKNCEPVVPNAPPAYE
    KLSAEQSPPPYSP.
        • Tyrosinase, including an exogenously obtained form useful in the compositions of the disclosure, has the following sequence (UNIPROT P14679):
  • (SEQ ID NO: 19)
    MLLAVLYCLLWSFQTSAGHFPRACVSSKNLMEKEC
    CPPWSGDRSPCGQLSGRGSCQNILLSNAPLGPQFP
    FTGVDDRESWPSVFYNRTCQCSGNFMGFNCGNCKF
    GFWGPNCTERRLLVRRNIFDLSAPEKDKFFAYLTL
    AKHTISSDYVIPIGTYGOMKNGSTPMFNDINIYDL
    FVWMHYYVSMDALLGGSEIWRDIDFAHEAPAFLPW
    HRLFLLRWEQEIQKLTGDENFTIPYWDWRDAEKCD
    ICTDEYMGGQHPTNPNLLSPASFFSSWQIVCSRLE
    EYNSHQSLCNGTPEGPLRRNPGNHDKSRTPRLPSS
    ADVEFCLSLTQYESGSMDKAANFSFRNTLEGFASP
    LTGIADASQSSMHNALHIYMNGTMSQVQGSANDPI
    FLLHHAFVDSIFEQWLRRHRPLQEVYPEANAPIGH
    NRESYMVPFIPLYRNGDFFISSKDLGYDYSYLQDS
    DPDSFQDYIKSYLEQASRIWSWLLGAAMVGAVLTA
    LLAGLVSLLCRHKRKQLPEEKQPLLMEKEDYHSLY
    QSHL.
        • Melanocyte protein PMEL, gp100, including an exogenously obtained form useful in the compositions of the disclosure, has the following sequence (UNIPROT P40967):
  • (SEQ ID NO: 20)
    MDLVLKRCLLHLAVIGALLAVGATKVPRNQDWLGV
    SRQLRTKAWNRQLYPEWTEAQRLDCWRGGQVSLKV
    SNDGPTLIGANASFSIALNFPGSQKVLPDGQVIWV
    NNTIINGSQVWGGQPVYPQETDDACIFPDGGPCPS
    GSWSQKRSFVYVWKTWGQYWQVLGGPVSGLSIGTG
    RAMLGTHTMEVTVYHRRGSRSYVPLAHSSSAFTIT
    DQVPFSVSVSQLRALDGGNKHFLRNQPLTFALQLH
    DPSGYLAEADLSYTWDFGDSSGTLISRALVVTHTY
    LEPGPVTAQVVLQAAIPLTSCGSSPVPGTTDGHRP
    TAEAPNTTAGQVPTTEVVGTTPGQAPTAEPSGTTS
    VQVPTTEVISTAPVQMPTAESTGMTPEKVPVSEVM
    GTTLAEMSTPEATGMTPAEVSIVVLSGTTAAQVTT
    TEWVETTARELPIPEPEGPDASSIMSTESITGSLG
    PLLDGTATLRLVKRQVPLDCVLYRYGSFSVTLDIV
    QGIESAEILQAVPSGEGDAFELTVSCQGGLPKEAC
    MEISSPGCQPPAQRLCQPVLPSPACQLVLHQILKG
    GSGTYCLNVSLADTNSLAVVSTQLIMPGQEAGLGQ
    VPLIVGILLVLMAVVLASLIYRRRLMKQDFSVPQL
    PHSSSHWLRLPRIFCSCPIGENSPLLSGQQV.
      • In myasthenia gravis, a main antigen is acetylcholine receptor.
      • In pemphigus vulgaris and variants, main antigens are desmoglein 3, 1 and 4; other antigens include pemphaxin, desmocollins, plakoglobin, perplakin, desmoplakins, and acetylcholine receptor.
      • In bullous pemphigoid, main antigens include BP180 and BP230; other antigens include plectin and laminin 5.
      • In dermatitis herpetiformis Duhring, main antigens include endomysium and tissue transglutaminase.
      • In epidermolysis bullosa acquisita, a main antigen is collagen VII.
      • In systemic sclerosis, main antigens include matrix metalloproteinase 1 and 3, the collagen-specific molecular chaperone heat-shock protein 47, fibrillin-1, and PDGF receptor; other antigens include Scl-70, U1 RNP, Th/To, Ku, Jo1, NAG-2, centromere proteins, topoisomerase I, nucleolar proteins, RNA polymerase I, II and III, PM-Slc, fibrillarin, and B23.
      • In mixed connective tissue disease, a main antigen is U1snRNP.
      • In Sjogren's syndrome, the main antigens are nuclear antigens SS-A and SS-B; other antigens include fodrin, poly(ADP-ribose) polymerase and topoisomerase, muscarinic receptors, and the Fc-gamma receptor IIIb.
      • In systemic lupus erythematosus, main antigens include nuclear proteins including the “Smith antigen,” SS-A, high mobility group box 1 (HMGB1), nucleosomes, histone proteins and double-stranded DNA (against which auto-antibodies are made in the disease process).
      • In Goodpasture's syndrome, main antigens include glomerular basement membrane proteins including collagen IV.
      • In rheumatic heart disease, a main antigen is cardiac myosin.
      • In autoimmune polyendocrine syndrome type 1 antigens include aromatic L-amino acid decarboxylase, histidine decarboxylase, cysteine sulfinic acid decarboxylase, tryptophan hydroxylase, tyrosine hydroxylase, phenylalanine hydroxylase, hepatic P450 cytochromes P4501 A2 and 2A6, SOX-9, SOX-10, calcium-sensing receptor protein, and the type 1 interferons interferon alpha, beta and omega.
      • In neuromyelitis optica, a main antigen is AQP4.
        • Aquaporin-4, including an exogenously obtained form useful in the compositions of the disclosure, has the following sequence (UNIPROT P55087):
  • (SEQ ID NO: 21)
    MSDRPTARRWGKCGPLCTRENIMVAFKGVWTQAFW
    KAVTAEFLAMLIFVLLSLGSTINWGGTEKPLPVDM
    VLISLCFGLSIATMVQCFGHISGGHINPAVTVAMV
    CTRKISIAKSVFYIAAQCLGAIIGAGILYLVTPPS
    VVGGLGVTMVHGNLTAGHGLLVELIITFQLVFTIF
    ASCDSKRTDVTGSIALAIGFSVAIGHLFAINYTGA
    SMNPARSFGPAVIMGNWENHWIYWVGPIIGAVLAG
    GLYEYVFCPDVEFKRRFKEAFSKAAQQTKGSYMEV
    EDNRSQVETDDLILKPGVVHVIDVDRGEEKKGKDQ
    SGEVLSSV.
      • In uveitis, main antigens include Retinal S-antigen or “S-arrestin” and interphotoreceptor retinold binding protein (IRBP) or retinol-binding protein 3.
        • S-arrestin, including an exogenously obtained form useful in the compositions of the disclosure, has the following sequence (UNIPROT P10523):
  • (SEQ ID NO: 22)
    MAASGKTSKS EPNHVIFKKI SRDKSVTIYL GNRDYIDHVS
    QVQPVDGVVL VDPDLVKGKK VYVTLTCAFR YGQEDIDVIG
    LTFRRDLYFS RVQVYPPVGA ASTPTKLQES LLKKLGSNTY
    PFLLTFPDYL PCSVMLQPAP QDSGKSCGVD FEVKAFATDS
    TDAEEDKIPK KSSVRLLIRK VQHAPLEMGP QPRAEAAWQF
    FMSDKPLHLA VSLNKEIYFH GEPIPVTVTV TNNTEKTVKK
    IKAFVEQVAN VVLYSSDYYV KPVAMEEAQE KVPRNSTLTK
    TLTLLPLLAN NRERRGIALD GKIKHEDTNL ASSTIIKEGI
    DRTVLGILVS YQIKVKLTVS GFLGELTSSE VATEVPFRLM
    HPQPEDPAKE SYQDANLVFE EFARHNLKDA GEAEEGKRDK
    NDVDE.
        • IRBP, including an exogenously obtained form useful in the compositions of the disclosure, has the following sequence (UNIPROT P10745):
  • (SEQ ID NO: 23)
    MMREWVLLMSVLLCGLAGPTHLFQPSLVLDMAKVL
    LDNYCFPENLLGMQEAIQQAIKSHEILSISDPQTL
    ASVLTAGVQSSLNDPRLVISYEPSTPEPPPQVPAL
    TSLSEEELLAWLQRGLRHEVLEGNVGYLRVDSVPG
    QEVLSMMGEFLVAHVWGNLMGTSALVLDLRHCTGG
    QVSGIPYIISYLHPGNTILHVDTIYNRPSNTTTEI
    WTLPQVLGERYGADKDVVVLTSSQTRGVAEDIAHI
    LKQMRRAIVVGERTGGGALDLRKLRIGESDFFFTV
    PVSRSLGPLGGGSQTWEGSGVLPCVGTPAEQALEK
    ALAILTLRSALPGVVHCLQEVLKDYYTLVDRVPTL
    LQHLASMDFSTVVSEEDLVTKLNAGLQAASEDPRL
    LVRAIGPTETPSWPAPDAAAEDSPGVAPELPEDEA
    IRQALVDSVFQVSVLPGNVGYLRFDSFADASVLGV
    LAPYVLRQVWEPLQDTEHLIMDLRHNPGGPSSAVP
    LLLSYFQGPEAGPVHLFTTYDRRTNITQEHFSHME
    LPGPRYSTQRGVYLLTSHRTATAAEEFAFLMQSLG
    WATLVGEITAGNLLHTRTVPLLDTPEGSLALTVPV
    LTFIDNHGEAWLGGGVVPDAIVLAEEALDKAQEVL
    EFHQSLGALVEGTGHLLEAHYARPEVVGQTSALLR
    AKLAQGAYRTAVDLESLASQLTADLQEVSGDHRLL
    VFHSPGELVVEEAPPPPPAVPSPEELTYLIEALFK
    TEVLPGQLGYLRFDAMAELETVKAVGPQLVRLVWQ
    QLVDTAALVIDLRYNPGSYSTAIPLLCSYFFEAEP
    RQHLYSVFDRATSKVTEVWTLPQVAGQRYGSHKDL
    YILMSHTSGSAAEAFAHTMQDLQRATVIGEPTAGG
    ALSVGIYQVGSSPLYASMPTQMAMSATTGKAWDLA
    GVEPDITVPMSEALSIAQDIVALRAKVPTVLQTAG
    KLVADNYASAELGAKMATKLSGLQSRYSRVTSEVA
    LAEILGADLQMLSGDPHLKAAHIPENAKDRIPGIV
    PMQIPSPEVFEELIKFSFHTNVLEDNIGYLRFDMF
    GDGELLTQVSRLLVEHIWKKIMHTDAMIIDMRFNI
    GGPTSSIPILCSYFFDEGPPVLLDKIYSRPDDSVS
    ELWTHAQVVGERYGSKKSMVILTSSVTAGTAEEFT
    YIMKRLGRALVIGEVTSGGCQPPQTYHVDDTNLYL
    TIPTARSVGASDGSSWEGVGVTPHVVVPAEEALAR
    AKEMLQHNQLRVKRSPGLQDHL
  • In the embodiments where the antigen is a foreign antigen against which an unwanted immune response can be developed, such as food antigens, specific antigens can be:
      • from peanut: conarachin (Ara h 1), allergen II (Ara h 2), arachis agglutinin, conglutin (Ara h 6);
        • conarachin, for example has the sequence identified as UNIPROT Q6PSU6
      • from apple: 31 kda major allergen/disease resistance protein homolog (Mal d 2), lipid transfer protein precursor (Mal d 3), major allergen Mal d 1.03D (Mal d 1);
      • from milk: α-lactalbumin (ALA), lactotransferrin; from kiwi: actinidin (Act c 1, Act d 1), phytocystatin, thaumatin-like protein (Act d 2), kiwellin (Act d 5);
      • from egg whites: ovomucoid, ovalbumin, ovotransferrin, and lysozyme;
      • from egg yolks: livetin, apovitillin, and vosvetin;
      • from mustard: 2S albumin (Sin a 1), 11S globulin (Sin a 2), lipid transfer protein (Sin a 3), profilin (Sin a 4);
      • from celery: profilin (Api g 4), high molecular weight glycoprotein (Api g 5);
      • from shrimp: Pen a 1 allergen (Pen a 1), allergen Pen m 2 (Pen m 2), tropomyosin fast isoform;
      • from wheat and/or other cerials: high molecular weight glutenin, low molecular weight glutenin, alpha-, gamma- and omega-gliadin, hordein, secalin and/or avenin;
        • peptides/epitopes useful in the compositions of the disclosure for treating Celiac Disease include some or all of the following sequences, individually in a composition of Formula 1 or together in a cocktail of compositions of Formula 1:
          • DQ-2 relevant, Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” native:
  • (SEQ ID NO: 24)
    LQLQPFPQPQLPYPQPQLPYPQPQLPYPQPQPF
          • DQ-2 relevant, Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” deamidated:
  • (SEQ ID NO: 25)
    LQLQPFPQPELPYPQPELPYPQPELPYPQPQPF
          • DQ-8 relevant, Alpha-gliadin:
  • (SEQ ID NO: 26)
    QQYPSGQGSFQPSQQNPQ
          • DQ-8 relevant, Omega-gliadin (wheat, U5UA46):
  • (SEQ ID NO: 27)
    QPFPQPEQPFPW
      • from strawberry: major strawberry allergy Fra a 1-E (Fra a 1); and
      • from banana: profilin (Mus xp 1).
  • In the embodiments where the antigen is a foreign antigen against which an unwanted immune response is developed, such as to animal, plant and environmental antigens, specific antigens can, for example, be: cat, mouse, dog, horse, bee, dust, tree and goldenrod, including the following proteins or peptides derived from:
      • weeds, (including ragweed allergens amb a 1, 2, 3, 5, and 6, and Amb t 5; pigweed Che a 2 and 5; and other weed allergens Par j 1, 2, and 3, and Par o 1);
      • grass (including major allergens Cyn d 1, 7, and 12; Dac g 1, 2, and 5; Hol I 1.01203; Lol p 1, 2, 3, 5, and 11; Mer a 1; Pha a 1; Poa p 1 and 5);
      • pollen from ragweed and other weeds (including curly dock, lambs quarters, pigweed, plantain, sheep sorrel, and sagebrush), grass (including Bermuda, Johnson, Kentucky, Orchard, Sweet vernal, and Timothy grass), and trees (including catalpa, elm, hickory, olive, pecan, sycamore, and walnut);
      • dust (including major allergens from species Dermatophagoides pteronyssinus, such as Der p 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 14, 15, 18, 20, 21, and 23; from species Dermatophagoides farina, such as Der f 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 22, and 24; from species Blomia tropicalis such as Blo t 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 19, and 21; also allergens Eur m 2 from Euroglyphus maynei, Tyr p 13 from Tyrophagus putrescentiae, and allergens Bla g 1, 2, and 4; Per a 1, 3, and 7 from cockroach);
      • pets (including cats, dogs, rodents, and farm animals; major cat allergens include Fel d 1 through 8, cat IgA, BLa g 2, and cat albumin; major dog allergens include Can f 1 through 6, and dog albumin);
      • bee stings, including major allergens Api m 1 through 12; and
      • fungus, including allergens derived from, species of Aspergillus and Penicillium, as well as the species Alternaria alternata, Davidiella tassiana, and Trichophyton rubrum.
  • As will be appreciated by those skilled in the art, a patient can be tested to identify an antigen against which an unwanted immune response has developed, and a protein, peptide or the like can be developed based on that antigen and incorporated as X in a composition of the present disclosure.
  • Sialated Antigens, Antibodies, Antibody Fragments
  • Following are examples of antigens, antibodies, antibody fragments having sialylation that can be removed to leave glycosylation specifically targeting the ASGPR: follicle stimulating hormone (FSH), human chorionic gonadotropin (HCG), luteinizing hormone (LH), osteopontin, thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH), agalsidase alfa, agalsidase beta (FABRAZYME®; Genzyme), epoetin alfa and epoetin beta, follitropin alfa (GONAL-F®; Merck/Serono) and follitropin beta (FOLLISTIM®; Schering-Plough), insulin growth factor binding protein 6 (IGFBP-6), lutropin alfa (LUVERIS®; Merck/Serono), transforming growth factor β1, antithrombin (ATryn®/TROMBATE-Ill®; Genzyme/Talecris Biotherapeutics), thyrotropin alfa (THYROGEN®; Genzyme), lenograstim, sargramostim (LEUKINE®; Genzyme), interleukin-3, prourokinase, lymphotoxin, C1-esterase inhibitor (Berinert®; CSL), IgG-like antibodies, interferon beta, coagulation factor Vila (NOVOSEVEN®; Novo Nordisk), coagulation factor VIII (moroctocog alfa), coagulation factor IX (nonacog alfa) (BENEFIX®; Wyeth), and the p55 tumor necrosis receptor fusion protein. (See: Byrne et al., Drug Discovery Today, Vol 12, No. 7/8, pages 319-326, April 2007 and Sola et al., BioDrugs. 2010; 24(1): 9-21). Pharmaceutically relevant proteins that have previously been hyperglycosylated and can be desialylated for hepatocyte-ASGPR taregeting include: interferon alfa and gamma, luteinizing hormone, Fv antibody fragments, asparaginase, cholinesterase, darbepoetin alfa (AraNESP®; Amgen), trombopoietin, leptin, FSH, IFN-α2, serum albumin, and corifollitropin alfa.
  • Proteins with glycans that do not normally terminate in sialic acids, including proteins produced in bacteria or yeast (such as arginase, some insulins, and uricase) would not be amenable to desialylation.
  • Those skilled in the art will appreciate that publicly available references, such as UNIPROT, disclose the presence and location of sites for desialylation on most if not all antigens, antibodies, antibody fragments and ligands of interest.
  • Antibodies and Peptide Ligands
  • In the embodiments employing an antibody, antibody fragment or ligand, such moieties are chosen to specifically bind a targeted circulating protein or peptide or antibody, and result in hepatic uptake of the circulating targeted moiety, possibly as an adduct with the targeting moiety, ultimately resulting in the clearance and inactivation of the circulating targeted moiety. For example, liver-targeted Factor VIII will bind and clear circulating Factor VIII antibodies. Procedures for the identification of such moieties will be familiar to those skilled in the art.
  • Linkers
  • The linkers employed in the compositions of the present disclosure (“Y” in Formula 1) can include N-hydroxysuccinamidyl linkers, malaemide linkers, vinylsulfone linkers, pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol) linkers, pyridyl di-thiol linkers, n-nitrophenyl carbonate linkers, NHS-ester linkers, nitrophenoxy poly(ethylene glycol)ester linkers and the like.
  • One particular group of linkers Formula Y′-CMP below (where Y′ indicates the remaining portion of the linker and R9 and Z are as defined). More particularly, in the group of linkers including Formula Y′-CMP, the R9 substituent is an ethylacetamido group, and even more particularly the ethylacetamido is conjugated with C1 of N-acetylgalactosamine or N-acetylglucosamine.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00008
  • Di-thiol-containing linkers, particularly particularly disulfanylethyl carbamate-containing linkers (named including a free amine of X, otherwise named a “disulfanyl ethyl ester” without including the free amine of X) are particularly advantageous in the present compositions as having the ability to cleave and release an antigen in its original form once inside a cell, for example as illustrated below (where Y′ indicates the remaining portion of the linker and X′ and Z are as defined).
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00009
  • Particularly with regard to the linkers illustrated below in Formula Ya through Formula Yp:
      • the the left bracket “(” indicates the bond between X and Y;
      • the right or bottom bracket “)” indicates the bond between Y and Z;
      • n is an integer representing a mixture including from about 1 to 100, particularly about 8 to 90 (e.g., 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65 70, 75, 80, 85, 90 or 95), more particularly about 40 to 80 (e.g., 39, 40, 43, 45, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, 55, 57, 60, 62, 65, 66, 68, 70, 73, 75, 78, 80 or 81) ethylene glycol groups, where the mixture typically encompasses the integer specified as n±10%;
      • p is is an integer representing a mixture including from about 2 to 150, particularly about 20 to 100 (e.g., 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100 or 105) and more particularly about 30 to 40 (e.g., 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43 or 44), where the mixture typically encompasses the integer specified as p±10%;
      • q is is an integer representing a mixture including from about 1 to 44, particularly about 3 to 20 (e.g., 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21 or 22) and more particularly about 4 to 12 (e.g., 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 or 13), where the mixture typically encompasses the integer specified as q±10%; and
      • R8 is —CH2— (“methyl”) or —CH2—CH2—C(CH3)(CN)— (“1-cyano-1-methyl-propyl” or “CMP”).
      • R9 is a direct bond or —CH2—CH2—NH—C(O)— (an ethylacetamido group or “EtAcN”), as illustrated in the following structures of Formula 1 (where the EtAcN group is shown and the rest of the linker is referred to as Y′):
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00010
  • and Z is galactose, galactosamine or N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C1.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00011
    Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00012
  • (Linkers of Formula Yn can be synthisized via certain precursors that render Yn particularly suitable for conjugation to hydrophobic antigens.)
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00013
  • The linkers shown above as Formulae Yh through Yn are synthesized as isomers that are employed without separation. For example, the linkers of Formulae Yh, Yi, Yj and Yn will be a mixture of the 8,9-dihydro-1H-dibenzo[b,t][1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-d]azocin-8yl and 8,9-dihydro-3H-dibenzo[b,][1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-d]azocin-8yl structures illustrated below:
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00014
  • The linkers of Formulae Yk, YL and Ym will be a mixture of the 8,9-dihydro-1H-dibenzo[3,4:7,8]cycloocta[1,2-d][1,2,3]triazol-8-yl and 8,9-dihydro-1H-dibenzo[3,4:7,8]cycloocta[1,2-d][1,2,3]triazol-9-yl structures illustrated below:
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00015
  • The presence of such isomeric mixtures does not impair the functionality of the compositions employing such linkers.
  • Liver-Targeting Moieties
  • The galactosylating moieties employed in the compositions of the present disclosure serve to target the compositions to liver cells (for example, specifically binding hepatocytes) and can be selected from: galactose, galactosamine or N-acetylgalactosamine. The glucosylating moieties employed in the compositions of the present disclosure serve to target the compositions to liver cells (for example, specifically binding hepatocytes) and can be selected from: glucose, glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine. It has been reported that ASGPR affinity can be retained while modifying either side of galactose's C3/C4-diol anchor (Mamidyala, Sreeman K., et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2012, 134, 1978-1981), therefore the points of conjugation are particularly at C1, C2 and C6.
  • Particular galactosylating moieties include galactose or glucose conjugated at C1 or C6, galactosamine or glucosamine conjugated at C2, and N-acetylgalactosamine or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C6. Other particular liver-targeting moieties include N-acetylgalactosamine or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C2, more particularly conjugated to a linker bearing an R9 substituent that is CH2. Still other particular liver-targeting moieties include galactose, galactosamine, N-acetylgalactosamine, glucose, glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C1, more particularly conjugated to a linker bearing an R9 substituent that is an ethylacetamido group.
  • Nomenclature
  • The compositions of Formula 1 can be named using a combination of IUPAC and trivial names. For example, a compound corresponding to Formula 1 where X is a cyclobutyl moiety (shown instead of an antigen for illustrative purposes), Y is Formula Ya, m is 1, n is 4 and Z is N-acetylgalactosamin-2-yl or N-acetylglucosamin-2-yl:
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00016
  • can be named (Z)-(21-cyclobutyl-1-oxo-1-((2,4,5-trihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)amino)-4,7,10,13-tetraoxa-16,17-dithiahenicosan-21-ylidene)triaz-1-yn-2-ium chloride, so the corresponding composition of the disclosure where X is tissue transglutaminase can be named (Z)-(21-(tissue transglutaminase)-1-oxo-1-((2,4,5-trihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)amino)-4,7,10,13-tetraoxa-16,17-dithiahenicosan-21-ylidene)triaz-1-yn-2-ium chloride. The corresponding composition of the disclosure where X′ is tissue transglutaminase, m is 2, n is 4 and Z′ is N-acetylgalactosamin-2-yl or N-acetylglucosamin-2-yl can be named (3Z)-((tissue transgultaminase)-1,3-diylbis(1-oxo-1-((2,4,5-trihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)amino)-4,7,10,13-tetraoxa-16,17-dithiahenicosan-21-yl-21-ylidene))bis(triaz-1-yn-2-ium) chloride.
  • In the interest of simplification, the compositions of Formula 1 can be named using an alternative naming system by reference to X and correspondence to one of Formulae 1a to 1p (as illustrated in the reaction schemes) followed by recitation of the integers for variables m, n, p and/or q, R8, R9 and identification of the galactosylating moiety and the position at which it is conjugated. Under this system, the composition of Formula 1a where X is ovalbumin, m is 2, n is 4 and Z is N-acetylgalactosamin-2-yl can be named “F1a-OVA-m2-n4-2NAcGAL.” The corresponding composition of Formula 1a where X is ovalbumin, m is 2, n is 4 and Z is N-acetylglucosamin-2-yl can be named “F1a-OVA-m2-n4-2NAcGLU.”
  • Similarly, the following composition of Formula 1
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00017
  • can be named “2-((2-(((3-(3-(22-((3-acetamido-4,5-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)oxy)-16-cyano-16,18-dimethyl-13,19-dioxo-18-((phenylcarbonothioyl)thio)-3,6,9,12-tetraoxa-20-azadocosyl)-3,9-dihydro-8H-dibenzo[b,][1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-d]azocin-8-yl)-3-oxopropyl)carbamoyl)oxy)ethyl)disulfanyl)ethyl insulin carboxylate.” The isomer:
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00018
  • can be named “2-((2-(((3-(1-(22-((3-acetamido-4,5-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)oxy)-16-cyano-16,18-dimethyl-13,19-dioxo-18-((phenylcarbonothioyl)thio)-3,6,9,12-tetraoxa-20-azadocosyl)-1,9-dihydro-8H-dibenzo[b,f][1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-d]azocin-8-yl)-3-oxopropyl)carbamoyl)-oxy)ethyl)disulfanyl)ethyl insulin carboxylate” (bold lettering highlights added for convenience in identifying the difference between the formal names). Employing the naming system asopted for the present disclosure, both isomers can be named “F1n-insulin-m1-n1-p1-q4-CMP-EtAcN-1NAcGAL” where CMP indicates that R8 is 1-cyano-1-methyl-propyl, EtAcN indicates that R9 is ethylacetamido and 1NAcGAL indicates Z″ is N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C1. Absence of the abbreviation EtAcN before the designation for Z would indicate that R9 is a direct bond.
  • Preparation of the Compositions of the Disclosure
  • The compositions of Formula 1 can be prepared, for example, by adjusting the procedures described in Zhu, L., et al., Bioconjugate Chem. 2010, 21, 2119-2127. Syntheses of certain compositions of Formula 1 are also described below with reference to Reaction Schemes 1 to 14. Other synthetic approaches will be apparent to those skilled in the art.
  • Formula 101 (below) is an alternative representation of X
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00019
  • where R1 is a free surface amino (—NH2) or thiol (—SH) moiety positioned on X's three-dimensional structure so as to be accessible for conjugation to a linker, and X′ represents the remainder of X excluding the identified free amino group(s) [(X″ is used in the reaction schemes to represent the remainder of X excluding free thiol group(s)]. Depending upon the identity of X, there will be at least one (the N-terminal amine) and can be multiple R1 groups (predominantly from lysine residues or cysteine residues that are not involved in disulfide bonding), as represented by m, which is an integer from about 1 to 100, more typically 1 or from about 4 to 20, and most typically 1 to about 10.
  • Variables employed in the reaction schemes are as defined above, and additionally include the following, which should be understood to have these meanings absent any specific indication otherwise with respect to a particular reaction scheme or step.
      • R2 is OH or a protecting group;
      • R3 is OH, NH2, NHAc, a protecting group or NH-protecting group;
      • R4 is OH or a protecting group;
      • R5 is OH or a protecting group;
      • R6 is OH or a protecting group;
      • Z′ is galactose or glucose conjugated at C1 or C6, galactosamine or glucosamine conjugated at C2, or N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated or N-acetylglucosamine at C6;
      • R8 is —CH2— or —CH2—CH2—C(CH3)(CN)—; and
      • R9 is a direct bond and Z″ is N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C2;
      • R9 is an ethylacetamido group and Z″ is galactose, glucose, galactosamine, glucosamine, N-acetylgalactosamine or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C1.
  • Synthetic Reaction Parameters
  • The terms “solvent”, “inert organic solvent” or “inert solvent” mean a solvent inert under the conditions of the reaction being described in conjunction therewith [including, for example, benzene, toluene, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran (“THF”), dimethylformamide (“DMF”), chloroform, methylene chloride (or dichloromethane), diethyl ether, methanol, pyridine and the like]. Unless specified to the contrary, the solvents used in the reactions of the present disclosure are inert organic solvents.
  • The term “q.s.” means adding a quantity sufficient to achieve a stated function, e.g., to bring a solution to the desired volume (i.e., 100%).
  • Isolation and purification of the compounds and intermediates described herein can be effected, if desired, by any suitable separation or purification procedure such as, for example, filtration, extraction, crystallization, column chromatography, thin-layer chromatography or thick-layer chromatography, centrifugal size exclusion chromatography, high-performance liquid chromatography, recrystallization, sublimation, fast protein liquid chromatography, gel electrophoresis, dialysis, or a combination of these procedures. Specific illustrations of suitable separation and isolation procedures can be had by reference to the examples hereinbelow. However, other equivalent separation or isolation procedures can, of course, also be used.
  • Unless otherwise specified (including in the examples), all reactions are conducted at standard atmospheric pressure (about 1 atmosphere) and ambient (or room) temperature (about 20° C.), at about pH 7.0-8.0.
  • Characterization of reaction products can be made by customary means, e.g., proton and carbon NMR, mass spectrometry, size exclusion chromatography, infrared spectroscopy, gel electrophoresis.
  • Reaction Scheme 1 illustrates the preparation of compositions of Formula 1 where Z can be galactose, glucose, galactosamine, glucosamine, N-acetylgalactosamine or N-acetylglucosamine. In that regard and as defined above, Z′ as employed in Reaction Scheme 1 encompases galactose or glucose conjugated at C1 and C6 and corresponding to the following structures according to Formula 1:
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00020
  • galactosamine or glucosamine conjugated at C2 and corresponding to the following structure according to Formula 1:
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00021
  • and N-acetylgalactosamine or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C6 and corresponding to the following structure according to Formula 1:
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00022
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00023
    Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00024
  • As illustrated above in Reaction Scheme 1, Step 1, surface thiol group(s) can be generated on an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having free surface amino group(s) (Formula 101′) by contact with a Traut reagent (Formula 102) at a pH of about 8.0 for about 1 hour to give the Formula 103′, from which unreacted Traut's reagent is removed, e.g., via centrifugal size exclusion chromatography. The two structures shown below, illustrate the product of Reaction Scheme 1, Step 1, respectively showing the free surface amino group(s) originally found on X (i.e., Formula 103′ where X′ represents the remainder of X excluding the identified free surface amino groups) and omitting the free surface amino group(s) (i.e., Formula 103). This parallels the distinction illustrated as between X and Formula 101. The convention has been followed in the subsequent reaction schemes.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00025
  • In Reaction Scheme 1, Step 2, a pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-NHS ester (Formula 104) is contacted with galactosamine or glucosamine (Formula 105 where R3 is NH2 and R2, R4, R5 and R6 are OH) with stirring at about pH 8 for about 1 hour to give the corresponding pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-sugar of Formula 106A, which can be used without further purification.
  • In Reaction Scheme 1, Step 3, 4,4′-dithiodipyridine (Formula 107) is contacted with a thiol-poly(ethylene glycol)propanoic acid (Formula 108) to give the corresponding pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol)propanoic acid (Formula 109).
  • In Reaction Scheme 1, Step 4, the acid of Formula 109 is contacted with a protected galactose or N-acetylgalactosamine of Formula 105 where R2 is OH and R3, R4, R5 and R6 are protecting groups (“PG”), where R6 is OH and R2, R3, R4 and R5 are PG, or where R6 is N-acetyl and R2, R3, R4 and R5 are PG to give the corresponding pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-sugars of Formulae 106B, 106C and 106D, which can be used following de-protection.
  • In Reaction Scheme 1, Step 5, to a stirred solution of the product of Step 1 (Formula 103′) is added an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of the product of Step 2 or Step 4 (Formula 106, i.e., 106A, 106B, 106C or 106D) for about 1 hour, followed by centrifugal sized exclusion chromatography to remove any free remaining reactants to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1a, respectively, Formula 1aA, Formula 1aB, Formula 1aC and Formula 1aD.
  • The compositions corresponding to Formula 1a can be named, respectively, e.g., as follows:
      • “F1aA-X′-mm-nn” or “F1a-X′-mm-nn-2NGAL”
      • “F1aB-X′-mm-nn” or “F1a-X′-mm-nn-1GAL”
      • “F1aC-X′-mm-nn” or “F1a-X′-mm-nn-6GAL”
      • “F1aD-X′-mm-nn” or “F1a-X′-mm-nn-6NAcGAL”
      • “F1aA-X′-mm-nn” or “F1a-X′-mm-nn-2NGLU”
      • “F1aB-X′-mm-nn” or “F1a-X′-mm-nn-1GLU”
      • “F1aC-X′-mm-nn” or “F1a-X′-mm-nn-6GLU”
      • “F1aD-X′-mm-nn” or “F1a-X′-mm-nn-6NAcGLU”
        respectively, for products made employing an intermediate according to Formulae 106A-D.
  • Turning to Reaction Schemes 2-14 and for the purposes of the nomenclature employed therewith, except as expressly stated otherwise, Z″ refers to N-acetylgalactosamine or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C2:
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00026
  • or to galactose, glucose, galactosamine, glucosamine, N-acetylgalactosamine or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C1. It should be noted that the C1 conjugated compositions need to be protected during synthesis, for example by cyclizing the amine with the C3 hydroxyl and de-protecting following incorporation of the protected galactosamine into the adjacent portion of the linker.
  • The poly(galactose methacrylate) and poly(glucose methacrylate) reactants of Formulae 201, 401, 501, 601, 701, 803 and 1401 can be prepared by methacrylating galactose or glucose, e.g., contacting galactosamine and methacrylate anhydride, followed by reversible addition-fragmentation chain transfer (RAFT) polymerization with a corresponding RAFT agent in the presence of azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN) in a suitable solvent, starting with freeze-thaw cycles followed by heating at about 60-80° C., preferably 70° C. for about 5-8, preferably about 6 hours. The polymer can be precipitated in a lower alkanol, preferably methanol.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00027
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 2, an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having free surface thiol group(s) prepared, e.g., as described with reference to Reaction Scheme 1, Step 1 (Formula 103′) is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol) of Formula 201 for about 1 hour to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1b.
  • The compositions of Formula 1b can be named as follows:
      • “F1b-X′-mm-nn-pp-2NAcGAL” “F1b-X′-mm-nn-pp-2NAcGLU” or “F1b-X′-mm-nn-pp-EtAcN-Z”.
        For example, the composition of Formula 1b where X′ is uricase, m is 1, n is 4, p is 4 and Z″ is N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C2 can be named “F1b-uricase-m1-n4-p4-2NAcGAL” or “30-(uricase)-3,5,7,9-tetramethyl-12-oxo-1-phenyl-1-thioxo-3,5,7,9-tetrakis((2,4,5-trihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)carbamoyl)-13,16,19,22-tetraoxa-2,25,26-trithiatriacontan-30-iminium”.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00028
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 3, an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface thiol group(s) (cysteines) [Formula 101″ corresponding to Formula 101 and illustrating where X″, as the term will be subsequently employed, represents X excluding the identified free surface thiol group(s)] is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol) of Formula 201 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1c.
  • The compositions corresponding to Formula 1c can be named as follows:
      • “F1c-X′-mm-nn-pp-2NAcGAL” “F1c-X′-mm-nn-pp-2NAcGLU” or “F1c-X′-mm-nn-pp-EtAcN-Z”.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00029
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 4, an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface thiol group(s) of Formula 101″ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a pyridyl di-thiol of Formula 401 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1d.
  • The compositions corresponding to Formula 1d can be named as follows:
      • “F1d-X′-mm-pp-2NAcGAL” “F1d-X′-mm-pp-2NAcGLU” or “F1d-X′-mm-pp-EtAcN-Z”.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00030
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 5, an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface amino group(s) of Formula 101′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a n-nitrophenyl carbonate of Formula 501 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1e.
  • The compositions corresponding to Formula 1e can be named as follows:
      • “F1e-X′-mm-pp-2NAcGAL” “F1e-X′-mm-pp-2NAcGLU” or “F1e-X′-mm-pp-EtAcN-Z”.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00031
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 6, an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface amino group(s) of Formula 101′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a n-nitrophenyl carbonate poly(ethylene glycol)ester of Formula 601 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1f.
  • The compositions corresponding to Formula 1f can be named as follows:
      • “F1f-X′-mm-nn-pp-2NAcGAL” “F1f-X′-mm-nn-pp-2NAcGLU” or “F1f-X′-mm-nn-pp-EtAcN-Z”.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00032
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 7, an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface amino group(s) of Formula 101′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a NHS-ester poly(ethylene glycol)ester of Formula 701 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1g.
  • The compositions corresponding to Formula 1g can be named as follows:
      • “F1g-X′-mm-pp-2NAcGAL” “F1g-X′-mm-pp-2NAcGLU” or “F1g-X′-mm-pp-EtAcN-Z”
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00033
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 8, Step 1, an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface amino group(s) of Formula 101′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of an amine-reactive linker for Click chemistry of Formula 801 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 802.
  • In Reaction Scheme 8, Step 2, the product of Formula 802 is then contacted with an equivalent amount (again corresponding to the value of m) of a galactos(amine) polymer of Formula 803 to yield the corresponding isomeric product according to Formula 1h. The two isomers, illustrated above, result from non-specific cyclization of the azide of Formula 803 with the triple bond of Formula 802. Such non-specific cyclization occurs in the synthesis of other compositions where Y is selected from Formulae Yh through Yn, but will not be illustrated in each instance.
  • The compositions corresponding to Formula 1 h can be named as follows:
      • “F1h-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq-2NAcGAL” “F1h-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq-2NAcGLU” or “F1h-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq- EtAcN-Z”.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00034
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 9, Step 1, an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface thiol group(s) of Formula 101″ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a thiol-reactive linker for Click chemistry of Formula 901 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 902″.
  • In Reaction Scheme 9, Step 2, the product of Formula 902″ is then contacted with an equivalent amount (again corresponding to the value of m) of a galactos(amine) polymer of Formula 803 to yield the corresponding isomeric product according to Formula 1i.
  • The compositions corresponding to Formula 1i can be named as follows:
      • “F1i-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq-2NAcGAL” “F1i-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq-2NAcGLU” or “F1i-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq- EtAcN-Z”.
  • By following the procedures described with regard to Reaction Scheme 9, but substituting starting material 101″ with a compound of Formula 103′ (derivatized with the Traut reagent) there is obtained the corresponding isomeric product of Formula 1j as shown below.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00035
  • The compositions corresponding to Formula 1j can be named as follows:
      • “F1j-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq-2NAcGAL” “F1j-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq-2NAcGLU” or “F1j-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq- EtAcN-Z”.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00036
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 10, Step 1, an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface thiol group(s) of Formula 101″ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a thiol-reactive linker for Click chemistry of Formula 1001 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1002.
  • In Reaction Scheme 10, Step 2, the product of Formula 1002 is then contacted with an equivalent amount (again corresponding to the value of m) of a galactos(amine) polymer of Formula 803 to yield the corresponding isomeric product according to Formula 1k.
  • The compositions corresponding to Formula 1k can be named as follows:
      • “F1 k-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq-2NAcGAL” “F1 k-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq-2NAcGLU” or “F1 k-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq-EtAcN-Z”.
  • By following the procedures described with regard to Reaction Scheme 10, but substituting starting material 101″ with a compound of Formula 103′ (derivatized with the Traut reagent) there is obtained the corresponding isomeric product of Formula 1 L as shown below.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00037
  • The compositions corresponding to Formula 1 L can be named as follows:
      • “F1L-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq-2NAcGAL” “F1L-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq-2NAcGLU” or “F1L-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq- EtAcN-Z”.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00038
    Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00039
    Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00040
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 11, Step 1, galactose, protected galactosamine or N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine (Formula 1101 where R3 and R4 are OH, R3 is NH-protecting group (e.g., cyclized with R4) or R3 is NHAc and R4 is OH, respectively) is contacted with 2-chloroethan-1-ol followed by cooling and the dropwise addition of acetylchloride. The solution is warmed to room temperature and then heated to 70° C. for several hours. Ethanol is added to the crude product and the resulting solution is stirred in the presence of carbon and then filtered followed by solvent removal to yield the corresponding product of Formula 1102.
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 11, Step 2, the product of Formula 1102 is added to an excess of sodium azide and heated to 90° C. for several hours, then filtered followed by solvent removal to yield the corresponding product of Formula 1103.
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 11, Step 3, the product of Formula 1103 is added to a solution of palladium on carbon and ethanol, and stirred under hydrogen gas (3 atm) for several hours, then filtered followed by solvent removal to yield the corresponding product of Formula 1104.
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 11, Step 4, the product of Formula 1104 is added to a solution of methacrylate anhydride. Triethylamine is added and the reaction stirred for 2 hours followed by solvent removal and isolation to yield the corresponding product of Formula 1105.
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 11, Step 5, an azide-modified uRAFT agent (Formula 1106) is added to a solution of the product of Formula 1105 with azobisisobutyronitrile, subjected to 4 free-pump-thaw cycles and then stirred at 70° C. After several hours the corresponding polymer product of Formula 1107 is precipitated by addition of a lower alkanol followed by solvent removal. Where R3 is NH-protecting group (e.g., cyclized with R4) the protecting group(s) is(are) removed at this point.
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 11, Step 6, an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface amino group(s) of Formula 101′ is added to a pH 8.0 buffer and contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a dioxopyrrolidine of Formula 1108 with stirring. After 1 hour unreacted Formula 1108 is removed and the resulting product of Formula 1109 is used without further purification.
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 11, Step 7, the product of Formula 1107 is added to a pH 8.0 buffer, to which is added the product of Formula 1109. After stirring for 2 hours, the excess Formula 1107 is removed to yield the corresponding isomeric product of Formula 1 m.
  • By substituting N-(2,4,5-trihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)methacrylamide for the product of Formula 1105 in Step 5 and continuing with Steps 6 and 7, the corresponding isomeric product of Formula 1 m where Z″ is N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C2 are obtained.
  • The compositions corresponding to Formula 1 m can be named as follows:
      • “F1m-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq-EtAcN-Z” where Z″ is 1GAL, 1NGAL, 1NAcGAL, 1GLU, 1NGLU, 1NAcGLU, “F1m-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq-2NAcGAL” or “F1m-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq-2NAcGAL”.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00041
  • The synthetic approach of Reaction Scheme 12 is particularly suitable for hydrophobic antigens, antibodies, antibody fragments and ligands (e.g., Insulin) due to the use of organic solvents.
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 12, Step 1, an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface amino group(s) of Formula 101′ is dissolved in an organic solvent (e.g., DMF) containing triethylamine. To this is added an amount (corresponding to the value of m) of a compound of Formula 1201 followed by stirring and the addition of t-butyl methyl ether. The corresponding product of Formula 1202 is recovered as a precipitate.
  • The product of Formula 1202 is resuspended in the organic solvent and an amount (corresponding to the value of m) of Formula 1107 (obtained, e.g., as described with reference to Reaction Scheme 11) is added followed by stirring. The reaction product is precipitated via the addition of dichloromethane, followed by filtration and solvent removal. Purification (e.g., resuspension in PBS followed by centrifugal size exclusion chromatography yields the corresponding isomeric product of Formula 1 n.
  • The compositions corresponding to Formula 1n can be named as follows:
      • “F1n-X′-mm-nn-pp-qq-EtAcN-Z” where Z″ is 1GAL, 1NGAL, 1NAcGAL, 1GLU, 1NGLU, 1NAcGLU,
      • or
      • “F1m-X′-nm-nn-pp-qq-2NAcGAL” or “F1m-X′-nm-nn-pp-qq-2NAcGLU”.
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00042
  • In Reaction Scheme 13, Step 1, a nitrophenoxycarbonyl-oxyalkyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-NHS ester (Formula 1301) is contacted with galactose, galactosamine or N-acetylgalactosamine (Formula 105) to give the corresponding product of Formula 1302, along with the other two illustrated products, from which the desired nitrophenoxycarbonyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-carboxyethyl galactose, galactosamine or N-acetylgalactosamine of Formula 1302 is isolated before proceeding to the next step.
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 13, Step 2, an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface amino group(s) of Formula 101′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of the product of Formula 1302 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 10.
  • The compositions corresponding to Formula 10 can be named as follows:
      • “F1o-X′-mm-nn-Z′.”
  • Figure US20230093483A1-20230323-C00043
  • As illustrated in Reaction Scheme 14, an antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand having native free surface amino group(s) (Formula 101′) is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a pyridyl di-thiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-NHS ester of Formula 1401 to yield the corresponding product according to Formula 1p.
  • The compositions corresponding to Formula 1p can be named as follows:
      • “F1p-X′-mm-nn-pp-2NAcGAL” “F1p-X′-mm-nn-pp-2NAcGLU” or “F1p-X′-mm-nn-pp-EtAcN-Z”.
  • Particular Processes and Last Steps
  • A compound of Formula 103′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a compound of Formula 106 to give the corresponding product of Formula 1a.
  • A compound of Formula 103′ is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a compound of Formula 201 to give the corresponding product of Formula 1b.
  • A compound of Formula 802, 902 or 1002 is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a compound of Formula 803 to give the corresponding product of Formula 1 h, Formula 1i or Formula 1k, respectively.
  • A compound of Formula 1109 is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a compound of Formula 1107 to give the corresponding product of Formula 1m, particularly where n is about 80, p is about 30, q is about 4, and m being a function of the antigen is about 2 to 10.
  • A compound of Formula 1202 is contacted with an excess (corresponding to the value of m) of a compound of Formula 1107 to give the corresponding product of Formula 1n, particularly where n is about 1, p is about 30, q is about 4, and m being a function of the antigen is about 2 to 10.
  • Particular Compositions
  • By way of non-limiting example, a particular group preferred for the compositions, pharmaceutical formulations, methods of manufacture and use of the present disclosure are the following combinations and permutations of substituent groups of Formula 1 (sub-grouped, respectively, in increasing order of preference):
      • X is a foreign transplant antigen against which transplant recipients develop an unwanted immune response, a foreign antigen to which patients develop an unwanted immune response, a therapeutic protein to which patients develop an unwanted immune response, a self-antigen to which patients develop an unwanted immune response, or a tolerogenic portion thereof.
      • X is a therapeutic protein to which patients develop an unwanted immune response selected from: Abatacept, Abciximab, Adalimumab, Adenosine deaminase, Ado-trastuzumab emtansine, Agalsidase alfa, Agalsidase beta, Aldeslukin, Alglucerase, Alglucosidase alfa, α-1-proteinase inhibitor, Anakinra, Anistreplase (anisoylated plasminogen streptokinase activator complex), Antithrombin III, Antithymocyte globulin, Ateplase, Bevacizumab, Bivalirudin, Botulinum toxin type A, Botulinum toxin type B, C1-esterase inhibitor, Canakinumab, Carboxypeptidase G2 (Glucarpidase and Voraxaze), Certolizumab pegol, Cetuximab, Collagenase, Crotalidae immune Fab, Darbepoetin-α, Denosumab, Digoxin immune Fab, Dornase alfa, Eculizumab, Etanercept, Factor Vila, Factor VIII, Factor IX, Factor XI, Factor XIII, Fibrinogen, Filgrastim, Galsulfase, Golimumab, Histrelin acetate, Hyaluronidase, Idursulphase, Imiglucerase, Infliximab, Insulin (including rHu insulin and bovine insulin), Interferon-α2a, Interferon-α2b, Interferon-β1a, Interferon-β1 b, Interferon-γ1 b, Ipilimumab, L-arginase, L-asparaginase, L-methionase, Lactase, Laronidase, Lepirudin/hirudin, Mecasermin, Mecasermin rinfabate, Methoxy Ofatumumab, Natalizumab, Octreotide, Oprelvekin, Pancreatic amylase, Pancreatic lipase, Papain, Peg-asparaginase, Peg-doxorubicin HCl, PEG-epoetin-β, Pegfilgrastim, Peg-Interferon-α2a, Peg-Interferon-α2b, Pegloticase, Pegvisomant, Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase (PAL), Protein C, Rasburicase (uricase), Sacrosidase, Salmon calcitonin, Sargramostim, Streptokinase, Tenecteplase, Teriparatide, Tocilizumab (atlizumab), Trastuzumab, Type 1 alpha-interferon, Ustekinumab, and vW factor.
        • Especially where X is Abciximab, Adalimumab, Agalsidase alfa, Agalsidase beta, Aldeslukin, Alglucosidase alfa, Factor VIII, Factor IX, Infliximab, L-asparaginase, Laronidase, Natalizumab, Octreotide, Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase (PAL), or Rasburicase (uricase).
          • Particularly where X is Factor VIII, Factor IX, uricase, PAL or asparaginase.
      • X is a self-antigen polypeptide selected for treating type 1 diabetes mellitus, pediatric multiple sclerosis, juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, celiac disease, or alopecia universalis.
        • Especially where X is a self-antigen polypeptide selected for treating new onset type 1 diabetes mellitus, pediatric multiple sclerosis or celiac disease.
      • X is a foreign antigen to which patients develop an unwanted immune response
        • From peanut, including conarachin (Ara h 1)
        • From wheat, including Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” native (SEQ ID NO:24), Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” deamidated (SEQ ID NO:25), Alpha-gliadin (SEQ ID NO:26) and Omega-gliadin (SEQ ID NO:27).
        • From cat, including Fel d 1A (UNIPROT P30438) and Cat albumin (UNIPROT P49064).
        • From dog, including Can f 1 (UNIPROT 018873) and Dog albumin (UNIPROT P49822).
      • X is a foreign transplant antigen against which transplant recipients develop an unwanted immune response, e.g. a human leukocyte antigen protein.
      • X is an antibody, antibody fragment or ligand that specifically binds a circulating protein or peptide or antibody, which circulating protein or peptide or antibody gives rise to transplant rejection, immune response against a therapeutic agent, autoimmune disease, and/or allergy.
        • Especially where X binds an endogenous circulating protein or peptide or antibody.
      • Y is a linker selected from: Formula Ya, Formula Yb, Formula Yh, Formula Yi, Formula Yk, Formula Ym, Formula Yn, Formula Yo and Formula Yp.
        • Especially where n is 8 to 90±10%, p is 20 to 100±10%, and q is 3 to 20±3.
          • Particularly where n is 40 to 80±10%, p is 30 to 40±10%, and q is 4 to 12±3.
        • Especially where Y is Formula Ya, Formula Yb, Formula Ym or Formula Yn.
          • Particularly where n is 8 to 90±10%, p is 20 to 100±10% and q is 3 to 20±3.
            • More particularly where n is 40 to 80±10%, p is 30 to 40±10%, and q is 4 to 12±3.
          • Particularly where Z is conjugated to Y via an ethylacetamido group.
            • More particularly where Z is conjugated to Y at its C1.
            •  More particularly where R8 is CMP.
            • More particularly where R8 is CMP.
          • Particularly where R8 is CMP.
      • Z is galactose, galactosamine, N-acetylgalactosamine, glucose, glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine.
        • Especially where Z is galactose or N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C1, C2 or C6.
          • Particularly where Z is galactose or N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C1 or C2.
            • More particularly where Z is N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C1.
        • Especially where Z is glucose or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C1, C2 or C6.
          • Particularly where Z is glucose or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C1 or C2.
            • More particularly where Z is N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C1.
  • Each of the above-described groups and sub-groups are individually preferred and can be combined to describe further preferred aspects of the disclosure, for example but not by way of limitation, as follows:
      • X is a self-antigen polypeptide selected for treating type 1 diabetes mellitus, pediatric multiple sclerosis, juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, celiac disease, or alopecia universalis.
        • Especially where X is a self-antigen polypeptide selected for treating new onset type 1 diabetes mellitus, pediatric multiple sclerosis or celiac disease.
          • Particularly where Y is a linker selected from: Formula Ya, Formula Yb, Formula Yh, Formula Yi, Formula Yk, Formula Ym, Formula Yn, Formula Yo and Formula Yp.
            • Especially where n is 8 to 90±10%, p is 20 to 100±10%, and q is 3 to 20±3.
            •  Particularly where n is 40 to 80±10%, p is 30 to 40±10%, and q is 4 to 12±3.
            • Especially where Y is Formula Ya, Formula Yb, Formula Ym or Formula Yn.
            •  Particularly where n is 8 to 90±10%, p is 20 to 100±10% and q is 3 to 20±3.
            •  More particularly where n is 40 to 80±10%, p is 30 to 40±10%, and q is 4 to 12±3.
            •  Even more particularly where Z is conjugated to Y via an ethylacetamido group.
            •  More particularly where Z is conjugated to Y via an ethylacetamido group.
            •  Particularly where Z is conjugated to Y via an ethylacetamido group.
            • Especially where Z is galactose, galactosamine or N-acetylgalactosamine.
            •  Particularly where Z is galactose or N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C1, C2 or C6.
            •  More particularly where Z is galactose or N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C1 or C2.
            •  Even more particularly where Z is N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C1.
            • Especially where Z is glucose, glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine.
            •  Particularly where Z is glucose or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C1, C2 or C6.
            •  More particularly where Z is glucose or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C1 or C2.
            •  Even more particularly where Z is N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C1.
          • Particularly where Z is galactose, galactosamine or N-acetylgalactosamine.
            • Especially where Z is galactose or N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C1, C2 or C6.
            •  Particularly where Z is galactose or N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C1 or C2.
            •  More particularly where Z is N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C1.
          • Particularly where Z is glucose, glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine.
            • Especially where Z is glucose or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C1, C2 or C6.
            •  More particularly where Z is glucose or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C1 or C2.
            •  Even more particularly where Z is N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C1.
        • Especially where Y is a linker selected from: Formula Ya, Formula Yb, Formula Yh, Formula Yi, Formula Yk, Formula Ym, Formula Yn, Formula Yo and Formula Yp.
          • Particularly where n is 8 to 90±10%, p is 20 to 100±10%, and q is 3 to 20±3.
            • More particularly where n is 40 to 80±10%, p is 30 to 40±10%, and q is 4 to 12±3.
          • Particularly where Y is Formula Ya, Formula Yb, Formula Ym or Formula Yn.
            • More particularly where n is 8 to 90±10%, p is 20 to 100±10% and q is 3 to 20±3.
            •  More preferably where n is 40 to 80±10%, p is 30 to 40±10%, and q is 4 to 12±3.
            • More particularly where Z is conjugated to Y via an ethylacetamido group.
        • Especially where Z is galactose, galactosamine or N-acetylgalactosamine.
          • Particularly where Z is galactose or N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C1, C2 or C6.
            • More particularly where Z is galactose or N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C1 or C2.
            •  More preferably where Z is N-acetylgalactosamine conjugated at C1.
        • Especially where Z is glucose, glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine.
          • Particularly where Z is glucose or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C1, C2 or C6.
            • More particularly where Z is glucose or N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C1 or C2.
            •  More preferably where Z is N-acetylglucosamine conjugated at C1.
      • m is an integer from about 1 to 100.
        • m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100 or 110.
        • Particularly m is from about 1 to 20.
          • m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21 or 22.
          • More particularly m is about 10.
            • m is 9, 10 or 11.
      • n is an integer representing a mixture including from about 1 to 100
        • n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 25, 30, 34, 35, 37, 40, 41, 45, 50, 54, 55, 59, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 82, 83, 85, 88, 90, 95, 99, 100, 105 or 110.
          • Particularly n is about 8 to 90.
          • Particularly n is 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 25, 30, 34, 35, 37, 40, 41, 45, 50, 54, 55, 59, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 82, 83, 85, 88, 90, 95 or 99.
            • More particularly n is about 40 to 80.
            • More particularly n is 37, 40, 41, 45, 50, 54, 55, 59, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 82, 83 or 88.
        • n represents a mixture encompassing the ranges 1-4, 2-4, 2-6, 3-8, 7-13, 6-14, 15-25, 26-30, 42-50, 46-57, 60-82, 85-90, 90-110 and 107-113.
          • Particularly n represents a mixture encompassing the ranges 7-13, 6-14, 15-25, 26-30, 42-50, 46-57, 60-82, 85-90 and 82-99.
            • More particularly n represents a mixture encompassing the ranges 36-44, 42-50, 46-57, 60-82 and 75-85.
        • p is is an integer representing a mixture including from about 2 to 150.
          • p is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 6570, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160 or 165.
          • Particularly where n is an integer representing a mixture including from about 1 to 100.
            • Particularly n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 25, 30, 34, 35, 37, 40, 41, 45, 50, 54, 55, 59, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 82, 83, 85, 88, 90, 95, 99, 100, 105 or 110.
            •  More particularly where n is about 8 to 90.
            •  More particularly n is 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 25, 30, 34, 35, 37, 40, 41, 45, 50, 54, 55, 59, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 82, 83, 85, 88, 90, 95 or 99.
            •  Even more particularly where n is about 40 to 80.
            •  Even more particularly n is 37, 40, 41, 45, 50, 54, 55, 59, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 82, 83 or 88.
            • More particularly p is 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100 or 110.
            •  Particularly where n is an integer representing a mixture including from about 1 to 100.
            •  Particularly n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 25, 30, 34, 35, 37, 40, 41, 45, 50, 54, 55, 59, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 82, 83, 85, 88, 90, 95, 99, 100, 105 or 110.
            •  More particularly where n is about 8 to 90.
            •  More particularly n is 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 25, 30, 34, 35, 37, 40, 41, 45, 50, 54, 55, 59, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 82, 83, 85, 88, 90, 95 or 99.
            •  Even more particularly where n is about 40 to 80.
            •  Even more particularly n is 37, 40, 41, 45, 50, 54, 55, 59, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 82, 83 or 88.
            •  More particularly p is 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, or 44.
            •  Particularly where n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 25, 30, 34, 35, 37, 40, 41, 45, 50, 54, 55, 59, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 82, 83, 85, 88, 90, 95, 99, 100, 105 or 110.
            •  More particularly where n is about 8 to 90.
            •  More particularly n is 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 25, 30, 34, 35, 37, 40, 41, 45, 50, 54, 55, 59, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 82, 83, 85, 88, 90, 95 or 99.
            •  Even more particularly where n is about 40 to 80.
            •  Even more particularly n is 37, 40, 41, 45, 50, 54, 55, 59, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 82, 83 or 88.
        • q is is an integer representing a mixture including from about 1 to 44.
          • q is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 44 or 48.
  • Utility, Testing and Administration
  • General Utility
  • The compositions of the disclosure find use in a variety of applications including, as will be appreciated by those in the art, treatment of transplant rejection, immune response against a therapeutic agent, autoimmune disease, and food allergy.
  • In a preferred embodiment, the compositions of the disclosure are used to modulate, particularly down-regulate, antigen-specific undesirable immune response.
  • The compositions of the disclosure are useful to bind and clear from the circulation specific undesired proteins, including antibodies endogenously generated in a patient (i.e., not exogenous antibodies administered to a patient), peptides and the like, which cause autoimmunity and associated pathologies, allergy, inflammatory immune responses, and anaphylaxis.
  • In the present disclosure, antigens are targeted to the liver for presentation via antigen-presenting cells to specifically down-regulate the immune system or for clearance of unwanted circulating proteins. This is distinct from previous uses of liver targeting, for example as described in US 2013/0078216, where the purpose of liver-targeting molecules such as DOM26h-196-61 was the delivery of therapeutic agents to treat liver diseases such as fibrosis, hepatitis, Cirrhosis and liver cancer.
  • The present disclosure provides compositions and methods to treat unwanted immune response to self-antigens and foreign antigens, including but not limited to: a foreign transplant antigen against which transplant recipients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., transplant rejection), a foreign antigen to which patients develop an unwanted immune (e.g., allergic or hypersensitivity) response, a therapeutic agent to which patients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., hypersensitivity and/or reduced therapeutic activity), a self antigen to which patients develop an unwanted immune response (e.g., autoimmune disease)
  • Autoimmune disease states that can be treated using the methods and compositions provided herein include, but are not limited to: Acute Disseminated Encephalomyelitis (ADEM); Acute interstital allergic nephritis (drug allergies); Acute necrotizing hemorrhagic leukoencephalitis; Addison's Disease; Alopecia areata; Alopecia universalis; Ankylosing Spondylitis; Arthritis, juvenile; Arthritis, psoriatic; Arthritis, rheumatoid; Atopic Dermatitis; Autoimmune aplastic anemia; Autoimmune gastritis; Autoimmune hepatitis; Autoimmune hypophysitis; Autoimmune oophoritis; Autoimmune orchitis; Autoimmune polyendocrine syndrome type 1; Autoimmune polyendocrine syndrome type 2; Autoimmune thyroiditis; Behcet's disease; Bronchiolitis obliterans; Bullous pemphigoid; Celiac disease; Churg-Strauss syndrome; Chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy; Cicatricial pemphigoid; Crohn's disease; Coxsackie myocarditis; Dermatitis herpetiformis Duhring; Diabetes mellitus (Type 1); Erythema nodosum; Epidermolysis bullosa acquisita, Giant cell arteritis (temporal arteritis); Giant cell myocarditis; Goodpasture's syndrome; Graves' disease; Guillain-Barre syndrome; Hashimoto's encephalitis; Hashimoto's thyroiditis; IgG4-related sclerosing disease; Lambert-Eaton syndrome; Mixed connective tissue disease; Mucha-Habermann disease; Multiple sclerosis; Myasthenia gravis; Optic neuritis; Neuromyelitis optica; Pemphigus vulgaris and variants; Pernicious angemis; Pituitary autoimmune disease; Polymyositis; Postpericardiotomy syndrome; Premature ovarian failure; Primary Biliary Cirrhosis; Primary sclerosing cholangitis; Psoriasis; Rheumatic heart disease; Sjogren's syndrome; Systemic lupus erythematosus; Systemic sclerosis; Ulcerative colitis; Undifferentiated connective tissue disease (UCTD); Uveitis; Vitiligo; and Wegener's granulomatosis.
  • A particular group of autoimmune disease states that can be treated using the methods and compositions provided herein include, but are not limited to: Acute necrotizing hemorrhagic leukoencephalitis; Addison's Disease; Arthritis, psoriatic; Arthritis, rheumatoid; Autoimmune aplastic anemia; Autoimmune hypophysitis; Autoimmune gastritis; Autoimmune polyendocrine syndrome type 1; Bullous pemphigoid; Celiac disease; Coxsackie myocarditis; Dermatitis herpetiformis Duhring; Diabetes mellitus (Type 1); Epidermolysis bullosa acquisita; Giant cell myocarditis; Goodpasture's syndrome; Graves' disease; Hashimoto's thyroiditis; Mixed connective tissue disease; Multiple sclerosis; Myasthenia gravis; Neuromyelitis optica; Pernicious angemis; Pemphigus vulgaris and variants; Pituitary autoimmune disease; Premature ovarian failure; Rheumatic heart disease; Systemic sclerosis; Sjogren's syndrome; Systemic lupus erythematosus; and Vitiligo.
  • In the embodiments employing an antigen against which an unwanted immune response is developed, such as food antigens, treatment can be provided for reactions against, for example: peanut, apple, milk, egg whites, egg yolks, mustard, celery, shrimp, wheat (and other cereals), strawberry and banana.
  • As will be appreciated by those skilled in the art, a patient can be tested to identify a foreign antigen against which an unwanted immune response has developed, and a composition of the disclosure can be developed based on that antigen.
  • Testing
  • In establishing the utility of the compositions and methods of the disclosure, specificity in binding to antigen-presenting cells in the liver (particularly binding to hepatocytes and specifically ASGPR) should initially be determined. This can be accomplished, for example, by employing a marker (such as the fluorescent marker phycoerythrin (“PE”)) in a composition of the disclosure. The composition is administered to suitable experimental subjects. Controls, e.g., unconjugated PE or vehicle (saline) are administered to other group(s) of subjects. The composition and controls are allowed to circulate for a period of 1 to 5 hours, after which the spleens and livers of the subjects are harvested and measured for fluorescence. The specific cells in which fluorescence is found can be subsequently identified. Compositions of the disclosure, when tested in this manner, show higher levels of concentration in the antigen-presenting cells of the liver as compared with unconjugated PE or vehicle.
  • Effectiveness in immune modulation can be tested by measuring the proliferation of OT-1 CD8+ cells (transplanted into host mice) in response to the administration of a composition of the disclosure incorporating a known antigen, such as ovalbumin (“OVA”), as compared with administration of the antigen alone or just vehicle. Compositions of the disclosure, when tested in this manner, show an increase of OT1 cell proliferation as compared with antigen alone or vehicle, demonstrating increased CD8+ T-cell cross-priming. To distinguish T cells being expanded into a functional effector phenotype from those being expanded and deleted, the proliferating OT-1 CD8+ T cells can be phenotypically analyzed for molecular signatures of exhaustion [such as programmed death-1 (PD-1), FasL, and others], as well as annexin-V as a hallmark of apoptosis and thus deletion. The OT-1 CD8+ T cells can also be assessed for their responsiveness to an antigen challenge with adjuvant in order to demonstrate functional non-responsiveness, and thus immune tolerance, towards the antigen. To do so, the cells are analyzed for inflammatory signatures after administration of compositions of the disclosure into host mice followed by an antigen challenge. Compositions of the disclosure when tested in this manner demonstrate very low (e.g., background) levels of inflammatory OT-1 CD8+ T cell responses towards OVA, thus demonstrating immune tolerance.
  • Humoral immune response can be tested by administering a composition of the disclosure incorporating a known antigen, such as OVA, as compared with the administration of the antigen alone or just vehicle, and measuring the levels of resulting antibodies. Compositions of the disclosure when tested in this manner show very low (e.g., background) levels of antibody formation responsive to their administration and the administration of vehicle, with significantly higher levels of antibody formation responsive to administration of the antigen.
  • Effectiveness in tolerization against an antigen can be tested as above with reference to humoral immune response, where several weeks following treatment(s) with a composition of the disclosure a group of subjects is challenged by administration of the antigen alone, followed by measuring the levels of antibodies to the antigen. Compositions of the disclosure when tested in this manner show low levels of antibody formation responsive to challenge with the antigen in groups pretreated with such compositions as compared to groups that are not pretreated.
  • Disease-focused experimental models are well known to those skilled in the art and include the NOD (or non-obese diabetic) mouse model of autoimmunity and tolerance and the EAE (experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis) model for the human inflammatory demyelinating disease, multiple sclerosis. In particular, the NOD mouse develops spontaneous autoimmune diabetes (similar to type 1a diabetes in humans). Groups of NOD mice are treated with test compound or a negative control, followed by measurement of BLOOD GLUCOSE. Successful treatment corresponds to likelihood of treating diabetes in humans or proof of mechanism for approaches to the treatment of other autoimmune diseases. (See, e.g., Anderson and Bluestone, Annu. Rev. Immunol. 2005; 23:447-85.)
  • Administration
  • The compositions of the disclosure are administered at a therapeutically effective dosage, e.g., a dosage sufficient to provide treatment for the disease states previously described. Administration of the compounds of the disclosure or the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof can be via any of the accepted modes of administration for agents that serve similar utilities.
  • While human dosage levels have yet to be optimized for the compounds of the disclosure, these can initially be extrapolated from the about 10 μg to 100 μg doses administered for mice. Generally, an individual human dose is from about 0.01 to 2.0 mg/kg of body weight, preferably about 0.1 to 1.5 mg/kg of body weight, and most preferably about 0.3 to 1.0 mg/kg of body weight. Treatment can be administered for a single day or a period of days, and can be repeated at intervals of several days, one or several weeks, or one or several months. Administration can be as a single dose (e.g., as a bolus) or as an initial bolus followed by continuous infusion of the remaining portion of a complete dose over time, e.g., 1 to 7 days. The amount of active compound administered will, of course, be dependent on any or all of the following: the subject and disease state being treated, the severity of the affliction, the manner and schedule of administration and the judgment of the prescribing physician. It will also be appreciated that amounts administered will depend upon the molecular weight of the antigen, antibody, antibody fragment or ligand as well as the size of the linker.
  • The compositions of the disclosure can be administered either alone or in combination with other pharmaceutically acceptable excipients. While all typical routes of administration are contemplated, it is presently preferred to provide liquid dosage forms suitable for injection. The formulations will typically include a conventional pharmaceutical carrier or excipient and a composition of the disclosure or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In addition, these compositions can include other medicinal agents, pharmaceutical agents, carriers, and the like, including, but not limited to the therapeutic protein, peptide, antibody or antibody-like molecule corresponding to the antigen (X) employed in the composition of the disclosure, and other active agents that can act as immune-modulating agents and more specifically can have inhibitory effects on B-cells, including anti-folates, immune suppressants, cyostatics, mitotic inhibitors, and anti-metabolites, or combinations thereof.
  • Generally, depending on the intended mode of administration, the pharmaceutically acceptable composition will contain about 0.1% to 95%, preferably about 0.5% to 50%, by weight of a composition of the disclosure, the remainder being suitable pharmaceutical excipients, carriers, etc. Dosage forms or compositions containing active ingredient in the range of 0.005% to 95% with the balance made up from non-toxic carrier can be prepared.
  • Liquid pharmaceutically administrable compositions can, for example, be prepared by dissolving, dispersing, etc. an active composition of the disclosure (e.g., a lyophilized powder) and optional pharmaceutical adjuvants in a carrier, such as, for example, water (water for injection), saline, aqueous dextrose, glycerol, glycols, ethanol or the like (excluding galactoses), to thereby form a solution or suspension. If desired, the pharmaceutical composition to be administered can also contain minor amounts of nontoxic auxiliary substances such as wetting agents, emulsifying agents, stabilizing agents, solubilizing agents, pH buffering agents and the like, for example, sodium acetate, sodium citrate, cyclodextrine derivatives, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine acetate and triethanolamine oleate, etc., osmolytes, amino acids, sugars and carbohydrates, proteins and polymers, salts, surfactants, chelators and antioxidants, preservatives, and specific ligands. Actual methods of preparing such dosage forms are known, or will be apparent, to those skilled in this art; for example, see Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, Pharmaceutical Press, 22nd Edition, 2012. The composition or formulation to be administered will, in any event, contain a quantity of the active compound in an amount effective to treat the symptoms of the subject being treated.
    • EXAMPLES
  • The following examples serve to more fully describe the manner of using the above-described disclosure, as well as to set forth the best modes contemplated for carrying out various aspects of the disclosure. It is understood that these examples in no way serve to limit the true scope of this disclosure, but rather are presented for illustrative purposes. All references cited herein are incorporated by reference in their entirety.
    • Example 1 F1aA-OVA-m4-n80 (or F1a-OVA-m4-n80-2NGAL)
  • 1A. Formula 103′ where X′ is OVA and m is 4
  • In an endotoxin-free tube, OVA (5.0 mg, 0.00012 mmol) was added to 100 μl of pH 8.0 PBS containing 5 mM EDTA and stirred. Separately, 1 mg of Traut's Reagent was dissolved in 100 μl of pH 7.0 PBS, and 16 μl (0.00119 mmol) of the Traut's Reagent solution so obtained was added to the stirred solution of OVA with continued stirring. After 1 hour, excess Traut's Reagent was removed using a centrifugal size exclusion column to afford the corresponding product of Formula 103′.
  • 1B. Formula 106A where n is 80
  • In an endotoxin-free tube, galactosamine (10.0 mg, 0.04638 mmol) was dissolved with stirring in 100 μl of pH 8.0 PBS containing 5 mM EDTA. Pyridyl dithiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-NHS ester (Formula 104 where n is 80) (16.23 mg, 0.00464 mmol) dissolved in 100 μl of pH 7.0 PBS was added to the stirring solution of galactosamine. After 1 hour, the resulting pyridyl dithiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-N-acetylgalactosamine (Formula 106A) was ready to be used without further purification.
  • 1C. Formula 1aA where X′ is OVA, m is 4, n is 80 (and Z′ is C2 galactosamine)
  • The purified OVA-Traut conjugate of Formula 103′ prepared in Example 1A was added directly to the stirring product of Formula 106A prepared in Example 1B. After 1 hour, the resulting product of Formula 1a was purified by passing the reaction mixture through a centrifugal size exclusion column. Characterization (UHPLC SEC, gel electrophoresis) confirmed product identity. (See FIG. 5 .)
  • 1 D. Other Compounds of Formula 103′
  • By following the procedure described in Example 1A and substituting OVA with the following:
      • Abciximab,
      • Adalimumab,
      • Agalsidase alfa,
      • Agalsidase beta,
      • Aldeslukin,
      • Alglucosidase alfa,
      • Factor VIII,
      • Factor IX,
      • L-asparaginase,
      • Laronidase,
      • Octreotide,
      • Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase,
      • Rasburicase,
      • Insulin (SEQ ID NO:5),
      • GAD-65 (SEQ ID NO:6),
      • IGRP (SEQ ID NO:7)
      • MBP (SEQ ID NO:8),
      • MOG (SEQ ID NO:9),
      • PLP (SEQ ID NO:10),
      • MBP13-32 (SEQ ID NO:11),
      • MBP83-99 (SEQ ID NO:12),
      • MBP111-129 (SEQ ID NO:13),
      • MBP146-170 (SEQ ID NO:14),
      • MOG1-20 (SEQ ID NO:15),
      • MOG35-55 (SEQ ID NO:16),
      • PLP139-154 (SEQ ID NO:17),
      • MART1 (SEQ ID NO:18),
      • Tyrosinase (SEQ ID NO:19),
      • PMEL (SEQ ID NO:20),
      • Aquaporin-4 (SEQ ID NO:21),
      • S-arrestin (SEQ ID NO:22),
      • IRBP (SEQ ID NO:23),
      • Conarachin (UNIPROT Q6PSU6),
      • Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” native (SEQ ID NO:24),
      • Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” deamidated (SEQ ID NO:25),
      • Alpha-gliadin (SEQ ID NO:26),
      • Omega-gliadin (SEQ ID NO:27),
      • Fel d 1A (UNIPROT P30438),
      • Cat albumin (UNIPROT P49064),
      • Can f 1 (UNIPROT 018873),
      • Dog albumin (UNIPROT P49822), and
      • RhCE example (UNIPROT P18577),
        there are obtained the following corresponding compounds of Formula 103′ where:
      • X is Abciximab and m is 10,
      • X is Adalimumab and m is 11,
      • X is Agalsidase alfa and m is 14,
      • X is Agalsidase beta and m is 14,
      • X is Aldeslukin and m is 6,
      • X is Alglucosidase alfa and m is 13,
      • X is Factor VIII and m is 100,
      • X is Factor IX and m is 18,
      • X is L-asparaginase and m is 5,
      • X is Laronidase and m is 7,
      • X is Octreotide and m is 1,
      • X is Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase and m is 12,
      • X is Rasburicase and m is 12,
      • X is Insulin (SEQ ID NO:5) and m is 2,
      • X is GAD-65 (SEQ ID NO:6) and m is 8,
      • X is IGRP (SEQ ID NO:7) and m is 7,
      • X is MBP (SEQ ID NO:8) and m is 6,
      • X is MOG (SEQ ID NO:9) and m is 5,
      • X is PLP (SEQ ID NO:10) and m is 8,
      • X is MBP13-32 (SEQ ID NO:11) and m is 1,
      • X is MBP83-99 (SEQ ID NO:12) and m is 1,
      • X is MBP111-129 (SEQ ID NO:13) and m is 1,
      • X is MBP146-170 (SEQ ID NO:14) and m is 2,
      • X is MOG1-20 (SEQ ID NO:15) and m is 1,
      • X is MOG35-55 (SEQ ID NO:16) and m is 2,
      • X is PLP139-154 (SEQ ID NO:17) and m is 3,
      • X is MART1 (SEQ ID NO:18) and m is 4,
      • X is Tyrosinase (SEQ ID NO:19) and m is 8,
      • X is PMEL (SEQ ID NO:20) and m is 5,
      • X is Aquaporin-4 (SEQ ID NO:21) and m is 4,
      • X is S-arrestin (SEQ ID NO:22) and m is 12,
      • X is IRBP (SEQ ID NO:23) and m is 21,
      • X is Conarachin and m is 21,
      • X is Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” native (SEQ ID NO:24) and m is 1,
      • X is Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” deamidated (SEQ ID NO:25) and m is 1,
      • X is Alpha-gliadin (SEQ ID NO:26) and m is 1,
      • X is Omega-gliadin (SEQ ID NO:27) and m is 1,
      • X is Fel d 1 and m is 4,
      • X is Cat albumin and m is 16,
      • X is Can f 1 and m is 6,
      • X is Dog albumin and m is 23, and
      • X is RhCE example and m is 10.
  • 1E. Other Compounds of Formula 1aA
  • By following the procedure described in Example 1C and substituting the compounds of Formula 103′, for example as obtained in Example 1D, there are obtained the following corresponding compounds of Formula 1aA:
      • F1aA-Abciximab-m10-n80,
      • F1aA-Adalimumab-m11-n80,
      • F1aA-Agalsidase alfa-m14-n80,
      • F1aA-Agalsidase beta-m14-n80,
      • F1aA-Aldeslukin-m6-n80,
      • F1aA-Alglucosidase alfa-m13-n80,
      • F1aA-Factor VIII-m100-n80,
      • F1aA-Factor IX-m18-n80,
      • F1aA-L-asparaginase-m5-n80,
      • F1aA-Laronidase-m7-n80,
      • F1aA-Octreotide-m1-n80,
      • F1aA-Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase-m12-n80,
      • F1aA-Rasburicase-m12-n80,
      • F1aA-Insulin-m2-n80,
      • F1aA-GAD-65-m8-n80,
      • F1aA-IGRP-m7-n80,
      • F1aA-MBP-m6-n80,
      • F1aA-MOG-m5-n80,
      • F1aA-PLP-m8-n80,
      • F1aA-MBP13-32-m1-n80,
      • F1aA-MBP83-99-m1-n80,
      • F1aA-MBP111-129-m1-n80,
      • F1aA-MBP146-170-m2-n80,
      • F1aA-MOG1-20-m1-n80,
      • F1aA-MOG35-55-m2-n80,
      • F1aA-PLP139-154-m3-n80,
      • F1aA-MART1-m4-n80,
      • F1aA-Tyrosinase-m8-n80,
      • F1aA-PMEL-m5-n80,
      • F1aA-Aquaporin-4-m4-n80,
      • F1aA-S-arrestin-m12-n80,
      • F1aA-IRBP-m21-n80,
      • F1aA-Conarachin-m21-n80,
      • F1aA-Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” native-m1-n80,
      • F1aA-Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” deamidated-m1-n80,
      • F1aA-Alpha-gliadin-m1-n80,
      • F1aA-Omega-gliadin-m1-n80,
      • F1aA-Fel d 1-m4-n80,
      • F1aA-Cat albumin-m16-n80,
      • F1aA-Can f 1-m6-n80,
      • F1aA-Dog albumin-m23-n80, and
      • F1aA-RhCE-m10-n80.
  • 1F. Other Compounds of Formula 106A
  • By following the procedure described in Example 1B and substituting the pyridyl dithiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-NHS ester (Formula 104 where n is 80) with the following:
      • Formula 104 where n is 12,
      • Formula 104 where n is 33,
      • Formula 104 where n is 40,
      • Formula 104 where n is 43,
      • Formula 104 where n is 50,
      • Formula 104 where n is 60,
      • Formula 104 where n is 75, and
      • Formula 104 where n is 80,
        there are obtained the following corresponding compounds of Formula 106A where:
      • n is 12,
      • n is 33,
      • n is 40,
      • n is 43,
      • n is 50,
      • n is 60,
      • n is 75, and
      • n is 84,
  • 1G. Other Compounds of Formula 1aA
  • By following the procedure described in Example 1E and substituting the compound of Formula 106A with the compounds obtained in Example 1F, there are obtained the corresponding compounds of Formula 1aA where n is 12, 33, 40, 43, 50, 60, 75 and 84, such as:
      • F1aA-Insulin-m2-n12,
      • F1aA-Insulin-m2-n33,
      • F1aA-Insulin-m2-n40,
      • F1aA-Insulin-m2-n43,
      • F1aA-Insulin-m2-n50,
      • F1aA-Insulin-m2-n60,
      • F1aA-Insulin-m2-n75, and
      • F1aA-Insulin-m2-n84.
  • 1H. Other Compounds of Formula 1aA
  • Similarly, by following the procedures described in Example 1A-G and substituting the compound glucosamine for galactosamine, there are obtained the corresponding compounds of Formula 1aA where Z′ is C2 glucosamine.
    • Example 2 F1b-OVA-m1-n4-p34-2NAcGAL
  • 2A. Formula 103′ where X′ is Ovalbumin and m is 1
  • In an endotoxin-free tube, OVA (6.5 mg, 0.000155 mmol) was added to 200 μl of pH 8.0 PBS containing 5 mM EDTA and stirred. Separately, 1 mg of Taut's Reagent was dissolved in 100 μl of pH 7.0 PBS, and 43 μl (0.00310 mmol) of the Traut's Reagent solution so obtained was added to the stirred solution of OVA with continued stirring. After 1 hour, non-reacted Traut's Reagent was removed using a centrifugal size exclusion column to afford the product of Formula 103′.
  • 2B. Formula 1b where X′ is Ovalbumin, m is 1, n is 4, p is 34, R9 is a direct bond and Z″ is 2NAcGAL
  • In a micro centrifuge tube, poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-(pyridyl disulfide) (Formula 201) (20.0 mg, 0.0020 mmol) was solubilized in 50 μl of pH 8.0 PBS containing 5 mM EDTA. To this was added the purified OVA-Traut product from Example 2A followed by stirring for 1 hour. The resulting product of Formula 1b was purified by passing the reaction mixture through a centrifugal size exclusion column. Characterization (UHPLC SEC, gel electrophoresis) confirmed the identity of the product. (See FIG. 5 .)
  • 2C. Other Compounds of Formula 1b
  • By following the procedure described in Example 2B and substituting the compounds of Formula 103′, for example as obtained in Example 1D, there are obtained the following corresponding compounds of Formula 1 b:
      • F1b-Abciximab-m10-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Adalimumab-m11-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Agalsidase alfa-m14-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Agalsidase beta-m14-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Aldeslukin-m8-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Alglucosidase alfa-m13-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Factor VIII-m100-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Factor IX-m18-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-L-asparaginase-m5-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Laronidase-m7-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Octreotide-m1-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase-m12-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Rasburicase-m12-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Insulin-m2-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-GAD-65-m8-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-IGRP-m7-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-MBP-m6-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-MOG-m5-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-PLP-m8-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-MBP13-32-m1-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-MBP83-99-m1-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-MBP111-129-m1-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-MBP146-170-m2-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-MOG1-20-m1-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-MOG35-55-m2-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-PLP139-154-m3-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-MART1-m4-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Tyrosinase-m8-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-PMEL-m5-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Aquaporin-4-m4-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-S-arrestin-m12-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-IRBP-m21-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Conarachin-m21-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” native-m1-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” deamidated-m1-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Alpha-gliadin-m1-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Omega-gliadin-m1-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Fel d 1-m4-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Cat albumin-m16-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Can f 1-m6-n4-p34-2NAcGAL,
      • F1b-Dog albumin-m23-n4-p34-2NAcGAL, and
      • F1b-RhCE-m10-n4-p34-2NAcGAL.
  • 1D. Other Compounds of Formula 1b
  • Similarly, by following the procedures described in Example 2B-C and substituting the compound poly(Glucosamine Methacrylate)-(pyridyl disulfide) or poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-(pyridyl disulfide), there are obtained the corresponding compounds of Formula 1b where Z″ is 2-NAcGLU.
    • Example 3 F1f-OVA-m1-n4-p33-2NAcGAL
  • 3A. Formula if where X′ is Ovalbumin and m is 1, n is 4, p is 33, R9 is a direct bond and Z″ is 2NAcGAL
  • In an endotoxin-free tube, OVA (4.0 mg, 0.0000952381 mmol) was added to 0.1 ml of pH 7.4 PBS and stirred. Separately, poly-(n-Acetylgalactosamine)-p-nitrophenyol carbonate of Formula 601 where n is 4 and p is 33 (33.0 mg, 0.002380952 mmol) was added to 100 μl. of pH 7.5 PBS and vortexed until dissolved. The two solutions were combined and the mixture was stirred vigorously for 1 hour. The mixture was then collected and dialyzed for 3 days against pH 7.4 PBS (30 kDa molecular weight cut off) to afford the product of Formula 1f.
  • 3B. Formula if where X′ is Ovalbumin and m is 1, n is 4, p is 33, R9 is a direct bond and Z″ is 2NAcGLU
  • Similarly, by following the procedure of Example 3A and substituting poly-(n-Acetylglucosamine)-p-nitrophenyol carbonate for poly-(n-Acetylgalactosamine)-p-nitrophenyol carbonate, there is obtained the corresponding compound of Formula 1f where Z″ is 2NAcGLU.
    • Example 4 F1g-PVA-m-p90-2NAcGAL
  • 4A. Formula 1q where X′ is Ovalbumin and m is 1, p is 90, R9 is a direct bond and Z″ is 2NAcGAL
  • In an endotoxin-free tube, OVA (5.0 mg, 0.000119048 mmol) was added to 0.2 ml of pH 7.4 PBS and stirred. To the stirring solution was added 75 mg (0.00297619 mmol) of Poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-NHS (Formula 701) dissolved in 0.4 ml of pH 7.4 PBS. The mixture was allowed to stir for 2 hours. The mixture was then collected and dialyzed for 3 days against pH 7.4 PBS (30 kDa molecular weight cut off) to afford the product of Formula 1g.
  • 4B. Formula 1q where X′ is Ovalbumin and m is 1, p is 90, R9 is a direct bond and Z″ is 2NAcGLU
  • Similarly, by following the procedure of Example 4A and substituting Poly(Glucosamine Methacrylate)-NHS for Poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-NHS, there is obtained the corresponding compound of Formula 1g where Z″ is 2NAcGLU.
    • Example 5 F1h-OVA-m2-n45-p55-q4-2NAcGAL
  • 5A. Formula 802′ where X′ is Ovalbumin, m is 2 and n is 45
  • In an endotoxin-free tube, OVA (3.0 mg, 0.0000714286 mmol) was added to 150 μl of pH 8.0 PBS containing 5 mM EDTA and stirred. Dibenzocyclooctyne-PEG-(p-nitrophenyl carbonate) (Formula 801) (5.265 mg, 0.002142857 mmol) dissolved in DMF was added to the OVA solution and stirred for 1 hour. The excess dibenzocyclooctyne-PEG-(p-nitrophenyl carbonate) was removed using a centrifugal size exclusion column to afford the product of Formula 802′.
  • 5B. Formula 1h where X′ is Ovalbumin, m is 2, n is 45, p is 55, q is 4, R8 is CH2, R9 is a direct bond and Z″ is 2NAcGAL
  • Poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-N3 (Formula 803 where p is 55, q is 4 and Z″ is N-acetylgalactosamine) (33 mg, 0.002142857 mmol) was dissolved in 100 μl of pH 7.4 PBS and added to the product of Example 5A with stirring. After 1 hour, the resulting product of Formula 1 h was purified by centrifugal size exclusion chromatography.
  • 5C. Formula 1h where X′ is Ovalbumin, m is 2, n is 45, p is 55, q is 4, R8 is CH2, R9 is a direct bond and Z″ is 2NAcGLU
  • Similarly, by following the procedure of Example 5B and substituting Poly(Glucosamine Methacrylate)-NHS for Poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-NHS, there is obtained the corresponding compound of Formula 1 h where Z″ is 2NAcGLU.
    • Example 6 F1j-OVA-m10-n45-p55-q4-2NAcGAL
  • 6A. Formula 103′ where X′ is Ovalbumin and m is 10
  • In an endotoxin-free tube, OVA (5.0 mg, 0.00019 mmol) was added to 150 μl of pH 8.0 PBS containing 5 mM EDTA and stirred. Separately, 1 mg of Taut's Reagent was dissolved in 100 μl of pH 7.0 PBS, and 16 μl (0.0019 mmol) of the Traut's Reagent solution so obtained was added to the stirred solution of OVA with continued stirring. After 1 hour, non-reacted Traut's Reagent was removed using a centrifugal size exclusion column to afford the product of Formula 103′.
  • 6B. Formula 902″ where X′ is Ovalbumin, m is 10 and n is 45
  • Dibenzocyclooctyne-PEG-(pyridyl disulfide) (Formula 901 where n is 45) (6.0 mg, 0.00238 mmol) was dissolved in DMF and the resulting solution was added to the OVA solution obtained in Example 6A and stirred for 1 hour. The excess dibenzocyclooctyne-PEG-(pyridyl disulfide) was removed using centrifugal size exclusion chromatography to afford the product of Formula 902″.
  • 6C. Formula 1j where X′ is Ovalbumin, m is 10, n is 45, p is 55, q is 4, R8 is CH2, R9 is a direct bond and Z″ is 2NAcGAL
  • Poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-N3 (Formula 803 where p is 55, q is 4 and Z″ is N-acetylgalactosamine) (36 mg, 0.00238 mmol) was dissolved in 150 μl of pH 7.4 PBS and added to the product of Example 6B with stirring. After 1 hour, the resulting product of Formula 1j was purified (excess p(GMA)-N3 removed) by centrifugal size exclusion chromatography. Characterization (UHPLC SEC, gel electrophoresis) confirmed the identity of the product.
  • 6D. Formula 1j where X′ is Ovalbumin, m is 10, n is 45, p is 55, q is 4, R8 is CH2, R9 is a direct bond and Z″ is 2NAcGLU
  • Similarly, by following the procedure of Example 6C and substituting Poly(Glucosamine Methacrylate)-NHS for Poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-NHS, there is obtained the corresponding compound of Formula 1j where Z″ is 2NAcGLU.
    • Example 7 F1L-OVA-m2-n80-p55-q4-2NAcGAL
  • 7A. Formula 1002 where X′ is Ovalbumin, m is 2 and n is 80
  • Dibenzocyclooctyne-PEG-(pyridyl disulfide) (Formula 1001 where n is 80) (9.0 mg, 0.00238 mmol) was dissolved in DMF and the resulting solution was added to a purified OVA solution of Formula 103′ (where X′ is Ovalbumin and m is 2), for example prepared as described in Example 6A and stirred for 1 hour. The excess dibenzocyclooctyne-PEG-(pyridyl disulfide) was removed using centrifugal size exclusion chromatography to afford the product of Formula 1002.
  • 7B. Formula 1 L where X′ is Ovalbumin, m is 2, n is 80, p is 55, q is 4, R8 is CH2, R9 is a direct bond and Z″ is 2NAcGAL
  • Poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-N3 (Formula 803 where p is 55, q is 4 and Z″ is N-Acetylgalactosamine) (36 mg, 0.00238 mmol) was dissolved in 150 μl of pH 7.4 PBS and added to the product of Example 7A with stirring. After 1 hour, the resulting product of Formula 1 L was purified (excess poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-N3 removed) by centrifugal size exclusion chromatography. Characterization (UHPLC SEC, gel electrophoresis) confirmed the identity of the product.
  • 7C. Formula 1L where X′ is Ovalbumin, m is 2, n is 80, p is 55, q is 4, R8 is CH2, R9 is a direct bond and Z″ is 2NAcGLU
  • Similarly, by following the procedure of Example 7B and substituting Poly(Glucosamine Methacrylate)-NHS for Poly(Galactosamine Methacrylate)-NHS, there is obtained the corresponding compound of Formula 1j where Z″ is 2NAcGLU.
    • Example 8 Preparation of poly(Galactosamine methacrylate) Polymers
  • 8A. Galactosamine Methacrylate
  • To stirred galactosamine hydrochloride (2.15 g, 10.0 mmol) was added 0.5 M sodium methoxide (22 ml, 11.0 mmol). After 30 minutes, methacrylate anhydride (14.694 g, 11.0 mmol) was added and stirring continued for 4 hours. The resulting galactosamine methacrylate was loaded onto silica gel via rotovap and purified via column chromatography using DCM:MeOH (85:15).
  • 8B. Formula 201 where n is 4 and p is 30
  • Galactose methacrylate (600 mg, 2.43 mmol), 2-(2-(2-(2-(pyridin-2-yldisulfanyl)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl 2-((phenylcarbonothioyl)thio)acetate (44.8 mg, 0.081 mmol) and AIBN (3.174089069 mg, 0.016 mmol) were added to 1.5 ml of DMF in a Schlenk Flask. The reaction mixture was subjected to 4 freeze-thaw cycles and then stirred at 70° C. for 6 hours. The desired polymer product of Formula 201 was precipitated in 12 ml of methanol, and excess solvent was removed under reduced pressure.
  • 8C. Formula 201 where n is 4 and p is 30
  • Similarly, by following the procedure of Example 8B and substituting Glucose methacrylate for galactose methacrylate there are obtained the corresponding poly(Glucosamine methacrylate) polymers.
    • Example 9 Preparation of F1aA-PE-m3-n80
  • 9A. Formula 103′ where X′ is Phycoerythrin
  • In an endotoxin-free tube, phycoerythrin (“PE”) (purchased from Pierce) (200 μl, 0.000004 mmol) was added to 50 μl of pH 8.0 PBS containing 5 mM EDTA and stirred. Separately, 1 mg of Taut's Reagent was dissolved in 100 μl of pH 7.0 PBS, and 2 μl (0.00013 mmol) of the Traut's Reagent solution so obtained was added to the stirred solution of PE with continued stirring. After 1 hour, excess Traut's Reagent was removed using a centrifugal size exclusion column to afford the product of Formula 103′.
  • 9B. Formula 106A where n is 80
  • In an endotoxin-free tube, galactosamine (7.0 mg, 0.03246 mmol) was dissolved with stirring in 100 μl of pH 8.0 PBS containing 5 mM EDTA. Pyridyl dithiol-poly(ethylene glycol)-NHS ester (Formula 104 where n is 80) (16.23 mg, 0.00464 mmol) dissolved in 50 μl of pH 7.0 PBS was added to the stirring solution of galactosamine. After 1 hour, the resulting product of Formula 106A was ready to be used without further purification.
  • 9C. Formula 1a where X′ is Phycoerythrin, m is 3, n is 80 and Z′ is galactosamine
  • The purified PE-Traut conjugates prepared in Example 9A were added directly to the stirring product of Formula 106A prepared in Example 9B. After 1 hour, the resulting product of Formula 1a was purified by passing the reaction mixture through a centrifugal size exclusion column. Characterization (UHPLC SEC, gel electrophoresis) confirmed the identity of the product.
  • 9D. Formula 1a where X′ is Phycoerythrin, m is 3, n is 80 and Z′ is glucosamine
  • Similarly, by following the procedure of Example 9B and C and substituting glucosamine for galactoseamine there is obtained the corresponding compound of Formula 1a where Z″ is glucosamine.
    • Example 10 Hepatic Distribution
  • 10A. F1aA-PE-m3-n80 was prepared, for example, as described in Example 9. A 30 μg/100p1 solution in sterile saline was prepared for injection.
  • The F1aA-PE-m3-n80 solution (30 μg) was administered to one of three groups of C57 black 6 mice 3 per group) via tail vein injection. The two other groups of mice received an equivalent volume of phycoerythrin in 100 μl of saline or saline vehicle. Three hours after administration, the livers and spleens of these animals were harvested and the level of cellular fluorescents in these organs was determined by flow cytometry as an indication of cellular PE content.
  • As shown in FIGS. 1A-1D, sinusoidal endothelial cells (LSECs) (1A), hepatocytes (1C), kupffer cells (KC) (1B), and other antigen-presenting cells (APCs) (1D) from the livers of mice treated with F1aA-PE-m3-n80 exhibited at least a three-fold increase in fluorescence as compared with animals that received PE solution. No detectible difference in fluorescence was found in spleen cells harvested from the three groups. These results confirm that F1aA-PE-m3-neo has sufficient specificity for binding to antigen-presenting cells in the liver.
  • 10B. By following the procedure described in Example 10A and substituting F1aA-PE-m3-n80 with the compounds F1b-PE-m3-n4-p34-2NAcGAL, F1f-PE-m3-n4-p33-2NAcGAL, F1g-PE-m3-p90-2NAcGAL, F1h-PE-m3-n45-p55-q4-2NAcGAL, F1j-PE-m3-n45-p55-q4-2NAcGAL, F1L-PE-m3-n80-p55-q4-2NAcGAL, F1m-PE-m3-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc, F1m-PE-m3-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH, F1n-PE-m3-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc and F1n-PE-m3-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH, prepared, for example, as described with reference to Example 9 by substitution for X in Examples 2B, 3, 4, 5B, 6B, 7B, 15G, 15L, 16B and 16F, respectively it is confirmed that the compounds F1aA-PE-m3-n80 with the compounds F1b-PE-m3-n4-p34-2NAcGAL, F1f-PE-m3-n4-p33-2NAcGAL, F1g-PE-m3-p90-2NAcGAL, F1h-PE-m3-n45-p55-q4-2NAcGAL, F1j-PE-m3-n45-p55-q4-2NAcGAL, F1L-PE-m3-n80-p55-q4-2NAcGAL, F1m-PE-m3-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc, F1m-PE-m3-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH, F1n-PE-m3-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc and F1n-PE-m3-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH have sufficient specificity for binding to antigen-presenting cells in the liver.
  • 10C. By following the procedure described in Example 10A and 10B and substituting the corresponding glycosylated compounds for the galactosylated compounds, it is confirmed that the glycosylated compounds have sufficient specificity for binding to antigen-presenting cells in the liver.
    • Example 11 Proliferation of Antigen-Specific OT1 CD8+ Tcells
  • 11A. F1aA-OVA-m4-n80 synthesized, for example, as described in Example 1, was prepared as a 10 μg/100 μl saline solution for injection. On day 0, 106 OT-1 T cells were fluorecently labeled and adoptively transferred into 3 groups of CD 45.2 mice (5 per group) via tail vein injection. The next day (i.e. Day 1), to each of the 3 groups of mice were administered, respectively, 10 μg of F1aA-OVA-m4-n80, OVA or saline via tail vein injection. On day 6, the animals were sacrificed and the % of splenic proliferating OT-1 cells was determined via florescence activated cell sorting.
  • The results from this study (see FIG. 2 ) show that the percentage of proliferating OTI T cells in mice treated with F1aA-OVA-m4-n80 (“Gal-OVA” in FIG. 2 ) was significantly greater than the percentage of proliferating OTI cells in the spleens of mice treated with OVA or saline (“naïve” in FIG. 2 ). The increase in OTI cell-proliferation demonstrates the increased CD8+ T-cell cross-priming in animals treated with F1aA-OVA-m4-n80 versus the other therapies. In concert with the results from Example 12, these results indicate that the ability of F1aA-OVA-m4-n80 to target antigens to the liver increases OVA presentation by antigen presenting cells in the liver to OVA-specific OTI T cells.
  • 11B. To distinguish T cells being expanded into a functional effector phenotype from those being expanded and deleted, the proliferating OTI CD8+ T cells were analyzed for annexin-V, as a hallmark of apoptosis and thus deletion, as well as the exhaustion marker programmed death-1 (PD-1). As shown in FIGS. 3A-3B, F1aA-OVA-m4-n80 (“Gal-OVA” in FIGS. 3A-3B) induced much higher numbers of annexin-V+ and PD-1+ proliferating OTI CD8+ T cells than soluble OVA.
  • 11C. By following the procedure described in Examples 11A and 11B, and substituting F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 with the compounds of Formula 1 obtained, for example, as described in Examples 3A, 4A, 5B, 6C, 7B and 19G, it is shown the compounds from Examples 3A, 4A, 5B, 6C, 7B and 19G induce much higher numbers of annexin-V+ and PD-1+ proliferating OTI CD8+ T cells than soluble OVA.
  • 11 D. By following the procedure described in Examples 11A and 11B and substituting F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 with the compounds of Formulae 1 and 2 obtained, for example, as described in Examples 1E, 1G, 2C, 15I, 15L, 16B, 16D and 16F, and substituting OVA with the antigens corresponding to X (or X′ or X″), respectively, it is shown that the compounds from Examples 1E, 1G, 2C, 15I, 15L, 16B, 16D and 16F induce much higher numbers of annexin-V+ and PD-1+ proliferating OTI CD8+ T cells than soluble antigen X.
  • 11E. By following the procedure described in Example 11A-D and substituting the corresponding glucosylated compounds for the galactosylated compounds, it is confirmed that the glucolsylated compounds induce much higher numbers of annexin-V+ and PD-1+ proliferating OTI CD8+ T cells than soluble antigen X.
    • Example 12 F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 does not Induce an OVA-Specific Antibody Response
  • 12A. In order to assess the humoral immune response to F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 we treated mice with a weekly i.v. injection of either F1aA-OVA-m4-nB or OVA, then measured the levels of OVA-specific antibodies in the blood. On day 0, 7, and 14 of the experiment, mice were administered an i.v. injection of 100 μl of saline containing one of the following: 1.) 6 μg of OVA; 2.) 6 μg of F1aA-OVA-m4-n8; 3.) 30 μg of OVA; 4.) 30 μg of F1aA-OVA-m4-n8, or 5.) saline alone. Each group contained 5 mice. On day 19, the mice were bled via cheek puncture, and the titer of OVA-specific antibodies in each mouse's blood was determined via ELISA. The results for this study show that although mice treated with 6 and 30 μg of OVA had increased OVA-specific antibody titers, mice treated with both 6 and 30 μg of F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 (“Gal-OVA” in FIG. 4 ) had blood titers similar to mice treated with saline (i.e. vehicle treated animals) (FIG. 4 ). For example mice treated with 6 and 30 μg of OVA had an average antibody titer of 3.5 and 2.5, respectively; whereas, mice treated with 6 and 30 μg of OVA had an average antibody titer of 0.75 and 0.25, respectively.
  • 12B. By following the procedure described in Example 12A and substituting F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 with the compounds of Formula 1 obtained, for example, as described in Examples 3A, 4A, 5B, 6C, 7B and 15G, it is shown that mice treated with the compounds from Examples 3A, 4A, 5B, 6C, 7B and 15G have OVA-specific antibody titers similar to mice treated with saline.
  • 12C. By following the procedure described in Example 12B and substituting F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 with the compounds of Formula 1 obtained, for example, as described in Examples 1E, 1G, 2C, 15I, 15L, 16B, 16D and 16F, and substituting OVA with the antigens corresponding to X (or X′ or X″), respectively, it is shown that mice treated with the compounds from Examples 1E, 1G, 2C, 15I, 15L, 16B, 16D and 16F have antigen X-specific antibody titers similar to mice treated with saline.
  • 12D. By following the procedure described in Example 12A-C and substituting the corresponding glucosylated compounds for the galactosylated compounds, it is confirmed that the glucolsylated compounds have antigen X-specific antibody titers similar to mice treated with saline.
    • Example 13 F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 Depletes OVA-Specific Antibodies
  • 13A. We treated mice that had different OVA-antibody blood titers (each mouse had a titer from 0 to 4.5) with an i.v. injection of 20 μg of F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 solubilized in 100 μl saline. Mice were given i.v. injections of F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 on days 0, 5, 7, 12, and 14 (Injections of F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 are labeled as “Gal-OVA” and shown as green arrows on the x-axis of FIG. 5 ). In order to determine the ability of F1aA-OVA-m4-nB to deplete serum OVA-specific antibodies, the mice were bled on day −1 to establish an initial antibody titer and then subsequent bleeds were carried out after each injection of F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 on days 2, 6, 9, 13, and 16. The antibody titer for each mouse was determined via ELISA. The results from this study show that F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 is able to deplete serum antibody levels in mice. For example, one day after the first F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 injection (i.e. day 2), mice with positive OVA-antibody titers experience a 5 to 100-fold decrease in serum antibody levels (FIG. 5 ). Our results show that although over the course of the 19 day experiment, antibody titers did increase for certain mice, the titer levels never reached the initial antibody titer measured on Day −1 and subsequent doses of F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 were effective in reducing these transient increases in antibody titers. These results demonstrate that F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 has the specificity to bind serum OVA-specific antibodies and the kinetics required to deplete OVA-specific serum antibodies.
  • 13B. By following the procedure described in Example 13A and substituting F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 with the compounds of Formula 1 obtained, for example, as described in Examples 3A, 4A, 5B, 6C, 7B and 15G, it is shown that the compounds from Examples 3A, 4A, 5B, 6C, 7B and 15G have the specificity to bind serum OVA-specific antibodies and the kinetics required to deplete OVA-specific serum antibodies.
  • 13C. By following the procedure described in Example 13A and substituting F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 with the compounds of Formulae 1 obtained, for example, as described in Examples 1E, 1G, 2C, 10D, 15I, 15L, 16B, 16D and 16F, and substituting OVA with the antigens corresponding to X (or X′ or X″), respectively, it is shown that the compounds from Examples 1E, 1G, 2C, 15I, 15L, 16B, 16D and 16F have the specificity to bind serum antigen X-specific antibodies and the kinetics required to deplete antigen X-specific serum antibodies.
  • 13D. By following the procedure described in Example 13A-C and substituting the corresponding glucosylated compounds for the galactosylated compounds, it is confirmed that the glucolsylated compounds have the specificity to bind serum antigen X-specific antibodies and the kinetics required to deplete antigen X-specific serum antibodies.
    • Example 14 OT-1 Challenge-to-Tolerance Model
  • 14A. Using an established OTI challenge-to-tolerance model (Liu, lyoda, et al., 2002), the ability of F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 (mGal-OVA) and F1b-OVA-m1-n4-p34 (pGal-OVA) to prevent subsequent immune responses to vaccine-mediated antigen challenge were demonstrated—even with a challenge involving a very strong bacterially-derived adjuvant (i.e. lipopolysaccharide). To tolerize, 233 nmol of either F1aA-OVA-m4-n8, F1b-OVA-m1-n4-p34, or soluble OVA were intravenously administered in 100 μl saline at 1 and 6 days following adoptive transfer of OTI CD8+ (CD45.2+) T cells to CD45.1+ mice (n=5 mice per group). After 9 additional days to allow potential deletion of the transferred T cells, the recipient mice were then challenged with OVA (10 μg) adjuvanted with lipopolysaccharide (LPS) (50 ng) by intradermal injection. Characterization of the draining lymph nodes 4 d after challenge allowed a determination as to whether or not deletion actually took place.
  • 14B. Intravenous administration of F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 and F1b-OVA-m1-n4-p34 resulted in profound reductions in OTI CD8+ T cell populations in the draining lymph nodes as compared to mice treated with unmodified OVA prior to antigen challenge with LPS, demonstrating deletional tolerance. For example, FIG. 6 shows that the draining lymph nodes from mice treated with either F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 (mGal-OVA) and F1b-OVA-m1-n4-p34 (pGal-OVA) contained over 9-fold fewer OTI CD8+ T cells as compared to OVA-treated mice, and more than 43-fold fewer than the challenge control mice that did not receive intravenous injections of antigen; responses in spleen cells were similar. These results demonstrate that F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 and F1b-OVA-m1-n4-p34 mitigated an OVA-specific immune response after adjuvanted OVA challenge.
  • 14C. By following the procedure described in Examples 14A and B, and substituting F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 and F1b-OVA-m1-n4-p34 with the compounds of Formula 1 obtained, for example, as described in Examples 3A, 4A, 5B, 6C, 7B and 15G, it is shown that the compounds from Examples 3A, 4A, 5B, 6C, 7B and 15G mitigate an OVA-specific immune response after adjuvanted OVA challenge.
  • 14D. By following the procedure described in Examples 14A and B, and substituting F1aA-OVA-m4-n8 and F1b-OVA-m1-n4-p34 with the compounds of Formula 1 obtained, for example, as described in Examples 1E, 1G, 2C, 15I, 15L, 16B, 16D and 16F, and substituting OVA with the antigens corresponding to X (or X′ or X″), respectively, it is shown that the compounds from Examples 1E, 1G, 2C, 15I, 15L, 16B, 16D and 16F mitigate an antigen X-specific immune response after adjuvanted antigen X challenge.
  • 14E. By following the procedure described in Example 14A-D and substituting the corresponding glucosylated compounds for the galactosylated compounds, it is confirmed that the glucolsylated compounds mitigate an antigen X-specific immune response after adjuvanted antigen X challenge.
    • Example 15 F1m-OVA-m2-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc
  • 15A. Formula 1102 where R3 is NHAc and R4 is OH
  • N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine (Formula 1101 where R3 is NHAc and R4 is OH) (5g, 22.6 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of chloroethanol (200 ml) at room temperature. The solution was cooled to 4° C. and acetylchloride was added drop-wise to the solution. The solution was brought to room temperature and then heated to 70° C. After 4 hours, the unreacted choroethanol was removed under reduced pressure. 100 ml of ethanol was added to the crude product and the resulting solution was stirred in the presence of carbon for 2 hours. The solution was filtered, and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The corresponding product of Formula 1102, N-(2-(2-chloroethoxy)-4,5-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)acetamide, was used without further purification.
  • 15B. Formula 1103 where R3 is NHAc and R4 is OH
  • The N-(2-(2-chloroethoxy)-4,5-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)acetamide prepared in Example 15A (2g, 7.4 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of DMF (100 ml) and sodium azide (4g, 61.5 mmol). The solution was headed at 90° C. for 12 hours and then filtered. The residual solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the crude product was purified via flash chromatography (10% MeOH in dichloromethane) to give the corresponding product of Formula 1103, N-(2-(2-azidoethoxy)-4,5-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)acetamide.
  • 15C. Formula 1104 where R3 is NHAc and R4 is OH
  • The N-(2-(2-azidoethoxy)-4,5-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)acetamide prepared in Example 15B (2 g, 6.9 mmol) was added to a solution of palladium on carbon and ethanol (50 ml). The solution was stirred under hydrogen gas (3 atm) for 4 hours. The resulting solution was filtered and the residual solvent was removed under reduced pressure to afford the corresponding product of Formula 1104, N-(2-(2-aminoethoxy)-4,5-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)acetamide, which was used without further purification.
  • 15D. Formula 1105 where R3 is NHAc and R4 is OH
  • The N-(2-(2-aminoethoxy)-4,5-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)acetamide prepared in Example 15C (1.0 g, 3.78 mmol) was added to a solution of methacrylate anhydride (0.583 g, 3.78 mmol) in DMF (50 ml). Triethylamine was then added to the solution and the reaction was stirred for 2 hours at room temperature. After 2 hours, the excess solvent was removed under reduced pressure, and the corresponding product of Formula 1105, N-(2-((3-acetamido-4,5-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)oxy)ethyl)methacrylamide, was isolated via flash chromatography.
  • 15E. Formula 1107 where p is 30, q is 4, R3 is NHAc, R4 is OH and R8 is CMP
  • An azide-modified uRAFT agent of Formula 1106 where q is 4 (28 mg) was added to a solution of N-(2-((3-acetamido-4,5-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)oxy)ethyl)methacrylamide prepared in Example 15D (579 mg, 1.74 mmol) and azobisisobutyronitrile (2.2 mg, 0.0116 mmol) in DMF. The reaction mixture was subjected to 4 free-pump-thaw cycles, and then stirred at 70° C. After 12 hours, the polymer product of Formula 1107, where p is 30 and q is 4 was precipitated from the reaction mixture via the addition of methanol. The solvent was decanted from the solid and the solid was collected and residual solvent was removed via reduced pressure.
  • 15F. Formula 1109 where X′ is OVA, m is 2 and n is 80
  • Ovalbumin (5 mg, 0.00012 mmol) was added to 100 μl of sodium phosphate buffer (pH 8.0) and stirred. To this solution was added 5 mg of the compound of Formula 1108 where n is 80. After 1 hour, the unreacted compound of Formula 1108 was removed from the solution via centrifugal size-exclusion chromatography. The resulting buffered solution containing the corresponding product of Formula 1109 was used in the next reaction without further purification.
  • 15G. Formula 1m where X′ is OVA, m is 2, n is 80, p is 30, q is 4, R3 is NHAc and R8 is CMP
  • The solution prepared in Example 15F was added to 100 μl of sodium phosphate buffer (pH 8.0) which contained 10 mg of the product of Formula 1107 prepared in Example 15E. The reaction was allowed to stir for 2 hours and then the excess Formula 1107 was removed via centrifugal size exclusion chromatography to afford the corresponding isomeric product of Formula 1 m in solution, which was used in biological studies without further purification. The R3 substituent is shown in the name of the title compound as 2NHAc.
  • 15H. Other Compounds of Formula 1109
  • By following the procedure described in Example 15F and substituting OVA with the following:
      • Abciximab,
      • Adalimumab,
      • Agalsidase alfa,
      • Agalsidase beta,
      • Aldeslukin,
      • Alglucosidase alfa,
      • Factor VIII,
      • Factor IX,
      • L-asparaginase,
      • Laronidase,
      • Octreotide,
      • Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase,
      • Rasburicase,
      • Insulin (SEQ ID NO:5),
      • GAD-65 (SEQ ID NO:6),
      • IGRP (SEQ ID NO:7)
      • MBP (SEQ ID NO:8),
      • MOG (SEQ ID NO:9),
      • PLP (SEQ ID NO:10),
      • MBP13-32 (SEQ ID NO:11),
      • MBP83-99 (SEQ ID NO:12),
      • MBP111-129 (SEQ ID NO:13),
      • MBP146-170 (SEQ ID NO:14),
      • MOG1-20 (SEQ ID NO:15),
      • MOG35-55 (SEQ ID NO:16),
      • PLP139-154 (SEQ ID NO:17),
      • MART1 (SEQ ID NO:18),
      • Tyrosinase (SEQ ID NO:19),
      • PMEL (SEQ ID NO:20),
      • Aquaporin-4 (SEQ ID NO:21),
      • S-arrestin (SEQ ID NO:22),
      • IRBP (SEQ ID NO:23),
      • Conarachin (UNIPROT Q6PSU6),
      • Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” native (SEQ ID NO:24),
      • Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” deamidated (SEQ ID NO:25),
      • Alpha-gliadin (SEQ ID NO:26),
      • Omega-gliadin (SEQ ID NO:27),
      • Fel d 1A (UNIPROT P30438),
      • Cat albumin (UNIPROT P49064),
      • Can f 1 (UNIPROT 018873),
      • Dog albumin (UNIPROT P49822), and
      • RhCE example (UNIPROT P18577),
        there are obtained the following corresponding compounds of Formula 1109 where n is 80:
      • X is Abciximab and m is 10,
      • X is Adalimumab and m is 11,
      • X is Agalsidase alfa and m is 14,
      • X is Agalsidase beta and m is 14,
      • X is Aldeslukin and m is 6,
      • X is Alglucosidase alfa and m is 13,
      • X is Factor VIII and m is 100,
      • X is Factor IX and m is 18,
      • X is L-asparaginase and m is 5,
      • X is Laronidase and m is 7,
      • X is Octreotide and m is 1,
      • X is Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase and m is 12,
      • X is Rasburicase and m is 12,
      • X is Insulin (SEQ ID NO:5) and m is 2,
      • X is GAD-65 (SEQ ID NO:6) and m is 8,
      • X is IGRP (SEQ ID NO:7) and m is 7,
      • X is MBP (SEQ ID NO:8) and m is 6,
      • X is MOG (SEQ ID NO:9) and m is 5,
      • X is PLP (SEQ ID NO:10) and m is 8,
      • X is MBP13-32 (SEQ ID NO:11) and m is 1,
      • X is MBP83-99 (SEQ ID NO:12) and m is 1,
      • X is MBP111-129 (SEQ ID NO:13) and m is 1,
      • X is MBP146-170 (SEQ ID NO:14) and m is 2,
      • X is MOG1-20 (SEQ ID NO:15) and m is 1,
      • X is MOG35-55 (SEQ ID NO:16) and m is 2,
      • X is PLP139-154 (SEQ ID NO:17) and m is 3,
      • X is MART1 (SEQ ID NO:18) and m is 4,
      • X is Tyrosinase (SEQ ID NO:19) and m is 8,
      • X is PMEL (SEQ ID NO:20) and m is 5,
      • X is Aquaporin-4 (SEQ ID NO:21) and m is 4,
      • X is S-arrestin (SEQ ID NO:22) and m is 12,
      • X is IRBP (SEQ ID NO:23) and m is 21,
      • X is Conarachin and m is 21,
      • X is Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” native (SEQ ID NO:24) and m is 1,
      • X is Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” deamidated (SEQ ID NO:25) and m is 1,
      • X is Alpha-gliadin (SEQ ID NO:26) and m is 1,
      • X is Omega-gliadin (SEQ ID NO:27) and m is 1,
      • X is Fel d 1 and m is 4,
      • X is Cat albumin and m is 16,
      • X is Can f 1 and m is 6,
      • X is Dog albumin and m is 23, and
      • X is RhCE example and m is 10.
  • 15I. Other Compounds of Formula 1m
  • By following the procedure described in Example 15G and substituting the compounds of Formula 1109, for example as obtained in Example 15H, there are obtained the following corresponding compounds of Formula 1 m:
      • F1m-Abciximab-m10-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Adalimumab-m11-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Agalsidase alfa-m14-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Agalsidase beta-m14-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Aldeslukin-m6-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Alglucosidase alfa-m13-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Factor VIII-m100-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Factor IX-m1-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-L-asparaginase-m5-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Laronidase-m7-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Octreotide-m1-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase-m12-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Rasburicase-m12-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Insulin-m2-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-GAD-65-m8-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-IGRP-m7-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-MBP-m6-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-MOG-m5-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-PLP-m8-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-MBP13-32-m1-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-MBP83-99-m1-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-MBP111-129-m1-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-MBP146-170-m2-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-MOG1-20-m1-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-MOG35-55-m2-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-PLP139-154-m3-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-MART1-m4-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Tyrosinase-m8-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-PMEL-m5-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Aquaporin-4-m4-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-S-arrestin-m12-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-IRBP-m21-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Conarachin-m21-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” native-m1-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” deamidated-m1-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Alpha-gliadin-m1-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Omega-gliadin-m1-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Fel d 1-m4-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Cat albumin-m16-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Can f 1-m6-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1m-Dog albumin-m23-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc, and
      • F1m-RhCE-m10-n80-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc.
  • 15J. Formula 1107 where where p is 30, q is 8, R3 is OH, R4 is OH and R8 is CMP
  • By following the procedure described in Example 15A and substituting the N-acetyl-D-galactosamine with galactose, and following through to the procedure described in Example 15E except using an azide-modified uRAFT agent of Formula 1106 where q is 8, there is obtained the compound of Formula 1107 where where p is 30, q is 8, R3 is OH, R4 is OH and R8 is CMP.
  • 15K. Formula 1109 where n is 62 and where X′ and m are as in Example 19H
  • By following the procedure described in Example 15F, substituting the OVA with the compounds as described in Example 15H and employing the compound of Formula 1108 where n is 62, there are obtained the corresponding compounds of Formula 1109 where n is 62.
  • 15L. Other Compounds of Formula 1 m
  • By following the procedure described in Example 15G and substituting the compound of Formula 1107 with the compounds obtained in Example 15J, and substituting the compound of Formula 1109 with the compounds obtained in Example 15K, there are obtained the following corresponding compounds of Formula 1 m:
      • F1m-Abciximab-m10-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Adalimumab-m11-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Agalsidase alfa-m14-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Agalsidase beta-m14-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Aldeslukin-m6-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Alglucosidase alfa-m13-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Factor VIII-m100-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Factor IX-m18-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-L-asparaginase-m5-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Laronidase-m7-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Octreotide-m1-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase-m12-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Rasburicase-m12-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Insulin-m2-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-GAD-65-m8-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-IGRP-m7-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-MBP-m6-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-MOG-m5-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-PLP-m8-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-MBP13-32-m1-n2-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-MBP83-99-m1-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-MBP111-129-m1-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-MBP146-170-m2-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-MOG1-20-m1-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-MOG35-55-m2-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-PLP139-154-m3-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-MART1-m4-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Tyrosinase-m8-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-PMEL-m5-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Aquaporin-4-m4-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-S-arrestin-m12-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-IRBP-m21-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Conarachin-m21-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” native-m1-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” deamidated-m1-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Alpha-gliadin-m1-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Omega-gliadin-m1-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Fel d 1-m4-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Cat albumin-m16-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Can f 1-m6-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1m-Dog albumin-m23-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH, and
      • F1m-RhCE-m10-n62-p30-q8-CMP-2OH.
  • 15M. Other Compounds of Formula 1 m
  • By following the procedure described in Examples 15A-L and substituting the galactosamine or galactose with glucosamine or glucose, respectively, there are obtained the corresponding glucosylated compounds of Formula 1 m.
    • Example 16 F1n-insulin-m2-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc
  • 16A. Formula 1202 where X′ is Insulin, m is 2 and n is 1
  • Recombinant human insulin (5 mg) was added to 100 μl of DMF containing 10 μl of triethylamine and stirred until the insulin became soluble. To this solution was added 10 mg (0.0161 mmol) of a linker precursor of Formula 1201 where n is 1 and the reaction was allowed to stir. After 1 hour, 1.3 ml of tert-butyl methyl ether was added to isolate the corresponding product of Formula 1202, which was recovered as the precipitate. Residual DMF and tert-butyl methyl ether were removed under reduced pressure. Characterization via liquid chromatography, mass spectroscopy and polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis confirmed the identity of the product. The modified insulin product of Formula 1202 was used without further purification.
  • 16B. Formula 1n where X′ is Insulin, m is 2, n is 1, p is 30, q is 4 and R8 is CMP
  • The product of Formula 1202 obtained in Example 16A was resuspended in 100 μl of DMF. The polymer product of Formula 1107 obtained in Example 15E (10 mg) was added and the reaction was allowed to stir for 1 hour. After 1 hour, the reaction products were precipitated via the addition of dichloromethane (1.3 ml). The product was filtered and the residual solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The crude product was then resuspended in 500 μl of PBS, and the low molecular weight components were removed via centrifugal size exclusion chromatography to afford the corresponding isomeric product of Formula 1 n. Characterization via liquid chromatography, mass spectroscopy and polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis confirmed the identity of the product. The modified insulin product of Formula 1202 was used without further purification.
  • 16C. Other Compounds of Formula 1202
  • By following the procedure described in Example 15F and substituting OVA insulin with the following:
      • Abciximab,
      • Adalimumab,
      • Agalsidase alfa,
      • Agalsidase beta,
      • Aldeslukin,
      • Alglucosidase alfa,
      • Factor VIII,
      • Factor IX,
      • L-asparaginase,
      • Laronidase,
      • Octreotide,
      • Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase,
      • Rasburicase,
      • GAD-65 (SEQ ID NO:6),
      • IGRP (SEQ ID NO:7)
      • MBP (SEQ ID NO:8),
      • MOG (SEQ ID NO:9),
      • PLP (SEQ ID NO:10),
      • MBP13-32 (SEQ ID NO:11),
      • MBP83-99 (SEQ ID NO:12),
      • MBP111-129 (SEQ ID NO:13),
      • MBP146-170 (SEQ ID NO:14),
      • MOG1-20 (SEQ ID NO:15),
      • MOG35-55 (SEQ ID NO:16),
      • PLP139-154 (SEQ ID NO:17),
      • MART1 (SEQ ID NO:18),
      • Tyrosinase (SEQ ID NO:19),
      • PMEL (SEQ ID NO:20),
      • Aquaporin-4 (SEQ ID NO:21),
      • S-arrestin (SEQ ID NO:22),
      • IRBP (SEQ ID NO:23),
      • Conarachin (UNIPROT Q6PSU6),
      • Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” native (SEQ ID NO:24),
      • Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” deamidated (SEQ ID NO:25),
      • Alpha-gliadin (SEQ ID NO:26),
      • Omega-gliadin (SEQ ID NO:27),
      • Fel d 1A (UNIPROT P30438),
      • Cat albumin (UNIPROT P49064),
      • Can f 1 (UNIPROT 018873),
      • Dog albumin (UNIPROT P49822), and
      • RhCE example (UNIPROT P18577),
        there are obtained the following corresponding compounds of Formula 1202 where n is 1:
      • X is Abciximab and m is 10,
      • X is Adalimumab and m is 11,
      • X is Agalsidase alfa and m is 14,
      • X is Agalsidase beta and m is 14,
      • X is Aldeslukin and m is 6,
      • X is Alglucosidase alfa and m is 13,
      • X is Factor VIII and m is 100,
      • X is Factor IX and m is 18,
      • X is L-asparaginase and m is 5,
      • X is Laronidase and m is 7,
      • X is Octreotide and m is 1,
      • X is Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase and m is 12,
      • X is Rasburicase and m is 12,
      • X is GAD-65 (SEQ ID NO:6) and m is 8,
      • X is IGRP (SEQ ID NO:7) and m is 7,
      • X is MBP (SEQ ID NO:8) and m is 6,
      • X is MOG (SEQ ID NO:9) and m is 5,
      • X is PLP (SEQ ID NO:10) and m is 8,
      • X is MBP13-32 (SEQ ID NO:11) and m is 1,
      • X is MBP83-99 (SEQ ID NO:12) and m is 1,
      • X is MBP111-129 (SEQ ID NO:13) and m is 1,
      • X is MBP146-170 (SEQ ID NO:14) and m is 2,
      • X is MOG1-20 (SEQ ID NO:15) and m is 1,
      • X is MOG35-55 (SEQ ID NO:16) and m is 2,
      • X is PLP139-154 (SEQ ID NO:17) and m is 3,
      • X is MART1 (SEQ ID NO:18) and m is 4,
      • X is Tyrosinase (SEQ ID NO:19) and m is 8,
      • X is PMEL (SEQ ID NO:20) and m is 5,
      • X is Aquaporin-4 (SEQ ID NO:21) and m is 4,
      • X is S-arrestin (SEQ ID NO:22) and m is 12,
      • X is IRBP (SEQ ID NO:23) and m is 21,
      • X is Conarachin and m is 21,
      • X is Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” native (SEQ ID NO:24) and m is 1,
      • X is Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” deamidated (SEQ ID NO:25) and m is 1,
      • X is Alpha-gliadin (SEQ ID NO:26) and m is 1,
      • X is Omega-gliadin (SEQ ID NO:27) and m is 1,
      • X is Fel d 1 and m is 4,
      • X is Cat albumin and m is 16,
      • X is Can f 1 and m is 6,
      • X is Dog albumin and m is 23, and
      • X is RhCE example and m is 10.
  • 16D. Other Compounds of Formula 1 n
  • By following the procedure described in Example 16B and substituting the compounds of Formula 1202, for example as obtained in Example 16C, there are obtained the following corresponding compounds of Formula 1 m:
      • F1n-Abciximab-m10-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Adalimumab-m11-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Agalsidase alfa-m14-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Agalsidase beta-m14-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Aldeslukin-m6-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Alglucosidase alfa-m13-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Factor VIII-m100-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Factor IX-m18-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-L-asparaginase-m5-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Laronidase-m7-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Octreotide-m1-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase-m12-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Rasburicase-m12-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-GAD-65-m8-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-IGRP-m7-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-MBP-m6-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-MOG-m5-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-PLP-m8-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-MBP13-32-m1-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-MBP83-99-m1-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-MBP111-129-m1-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-MBP146-170-m2-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-MOG1-20-m1-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-MOG35-55-m2-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-PLP139-154-m3-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-MART1-m4-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Tyrosinase-m8-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-PMEL-m5-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Aquaporin-4-m4-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-S-arrestin-m12-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-IRBP-m21-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Conarachin-m21-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” native-m1-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” deamidated-m1-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Alpha-gliadin-m1-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Omega-gliadin-m1-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Fel d 1-m4-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Cat albumin-m16-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Can f 1-m6-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc,
      • F1n-Dog albumin-m23-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc, and
      • F1n-RhCE-m10-n1-p30-q4-CMP-2NHAc.
  • 16E. Formula 1202 where n is 33 and where X′ and m are as in Example 20C
  • By following the procedure described in Example 16F, substituting the insulin with the compounds as described in Example 16C and employing the compound of Formula 1201 where n is 33, there are obtained the corresponding compounds of Formula 1202 where n is 33.
  • 16F. Other Compounds of Formula 1 n
  • By following the procedure described in Example 16B and substituting the compound of Formula 1107 with the compounds obtained in Example 15J, and substituting the compound of Formula 1202 with the compounds obtained in Example 16E, there are obtained the following corresponding compounds of Formula 1n:
      • F1n-Abciximab-m10-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Adalimumab-m11-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Agalsidase alfa-m14-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Agalsidase beta-m14-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Aldeslukin-m6-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Alglucosidase alfa-m13-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Factor VIII-m100-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Factor IX-m18-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-L-asparaginase-m5-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Laronidase-m7-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Octreotide-m1-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Phenylalanine ammonia-lyase-m12-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Rasburicase-m12-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-GAD-65-m8-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-IGRP-m7-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-MBP-m6-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-MOG-m5-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-PLP-m8-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-MBP13-32-m1-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-MBP83-99-m1-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-MBP111-129-m1-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-MBP146-170-m2-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-MOG1-20-m1-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-MOG35-55-m2-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-PLP139-154-m3-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-MART1-m4-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Tyrosinase-m8-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-PMEL-m5-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Aquaporin-4-m4-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-S-arrestin-m12-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-IRBP-m21-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Conarachin-m21-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” native-m1-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Alpha-gliadin “33-mer” deamidated-m1-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Alpha-gliadin-m1-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Omega-gliadin-m1-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Fel d 1-m4-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Cat albumin-m16-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Can f 1-m6-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH,
      • F1n-Dog albumin-m23-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH, and
      • F1n-RhCE-m10-n33-p30-q8-CMP-2OH.
  • 16G. Other Compounds of Formula 1 n
  • By following the procedure described in Examples 16A-F and substituting the galactosylating moieties with glucosylating moieties, there are obtained the corresponding glucosylated compounds of Formula 1 n.
    • Example 17 NOD Mouse
  • Non-obese diabetic (NOD) mice are susceptible to the spontaneous onset of autoimmune diabetes mellitus, which is the result of an autoimmune response to various pancreatic auto-antigens. Diabetes develops in NOD mice as a result of insulitis, characterized by the infiltration of various leukocytes into the pancreatic islets.
  • In order to evaluate the efficacy of a treatment for diabetes mellitus, starting at 6-weeks of age, NOD mice are divided into control or test grops and treated, respectively, with weekly intravenous injections of a test composition (10 μg) or an inactive control such as saline. The injections continue for 18 consecutive weeks.
  • The blood glucose concentration of the mice is measured weekly. Mice that maintain a blood glucose concentration of less than 300 mg/ml during the experiment are considered non-diabetic. In addition, at the end of the study the pancreases of the mice are harvested and T cell infiltration in the pancreas is determined via immunohistochemistry as an assessment of insulitis. Tolerance induction is assessed by the depletion of auto-antigen specific CD8 T cells as compared to mice that are treated with saline and develop diabetes. The existence of auto-antigen specific CD8 T cells is determined via ELISpot assay.
  • When tested as described above, compositions of Formula 1 where X is insulin, such as F1m-insulin-m2-n1-p30-q4-2NAcGAL, show efficacy for treating diabetes mellitus.
  • Similarly, when tested as described above, compositions of Formula 1 where X is insulin, such as F1m-insulin-m2-n1-p30-q4-2NAcGLU, show efficacy for treating diabetes mellitus.
  • While the present disclosure has been described with reference to the specific embodiments thereof, it should be understood by those skilled in the art that various changes can be made and equivalents can be substituted without departing from the true spirit and scope of the disclosure. In addition, many modifications can be made to adapt a particular situation, material, composition of matter, process, process step or steps, to the objective, spirit and scope of the present disclosure. All such modifications are intended to be within the scope of the claims appended hereto. All patents and publications cited above are hereby incorporated by reference.

Claims (1)

1. A compound for the induction of antigen-specific immune tolerance in a subject, the compound comprising:
a peptide to which tolerance is desired;
wherein the peptide to which tolerance is desired, when presented to the subject alone, is capable of inducing an unwanted immune response in the subject;
a polymeric linker;
wherein the polymeric linker is coupled to the peptide to which tolerance is desired via a disulfide bond or a disulfanyl ethyl ester;
wherein the disulfide bond or the disulfanyl ethyl ester are each configured to be cleaved upon administration of the compound to the subject and to release the peptide to which tolerance is desired from the polymeric linker;
wherein the polymeric linker comprises a 1-cyano-1-methyl-propyl group and methacrylic units comprising an ethylacetamido functionality; and
a liver-targeting moiety;
wherein the liver-targeting moiety comprises a glucosylating moiety;
wherein the liver-targeting moiety is coupled to the polymeric linker through the ethylacetamido functionality.
US17/810,565 2014-02-21 2022-07-01 Glycotargeting therapeutics Pending US20230093483A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US17/810,565 US20230093483A1 (en) 2014-02-21 2022-07-01 Glycotargeting therapeutics

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201461942942P 2014-02-21 2014-02-21
US14/627,297 US10821157B2 (en) 2014-02-21 2015-02-20 Glycotargeting therapeutics
US14/859,292 US10946079B2 (en) 2014-02-21 2015-09-19 Glycotargeting therapeutics
US16/723,757 US11654188B2 (en) 2014-02-21 2019-12-20 Glycotargeting therapeutics
US17/810,565 US20230093483A1 (en) 2014-02-21 2022-07-01 Glycotargeting therapeutics

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/723,757 Continuation US11654188B2 (en) 2014-02-21 2019-12-20 Glycotargeting therapeutics

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20230093483A1 true US20230093483A1 (en) 2023-03-23

Family

ID=56692928

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/859,292 Active US10946079B2 (en) 2014-02-21 2015-09-19 Glycotargeting therapeutics
US16/723,757 Active US11654188B2 (en) 2014-02-21 2019-12-20 Glycotargeting therapeutics
US17/810,565 Pending US20230093483A1 (en) 2014-02-21 2022-07-01 Glycotargeting therapeutics

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/859,292 Active US10946079B2 (en) 2014-02-21 2015-09-19 Glycotargeting therapeutics
US16/723,757 Active US11654188B2 (en) 2014-02-21 2019-12-20 Glycotargeting therapeutics

Country Status (1)

Country Link
US (3) US10946079B2 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11793882B2 (en) 2014-02-21 2023-10-24 École Polytechnique Fédérale De Lausanne (Epfl) Glycotargeting therapeutics
US11801305B2 (en) 2014-02-21 2023-10-31 École Polytechnique Fédérale De Lausanne (Epfl) Glycotargeting therapeutics

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9850296B2 (en) 2010-08-10 2017-12-26 Ecole Polytechnique Federale De Lausanne (Epfl) Erythrocyte-binding therapeutics
US9517257B2 (en) 2010-08-10 2016-12-13 Ecole Polytechnique Federale De Lausanne (Epfl) Erythrocyte-binding therapeutics
AU2011289579B2 (en) 2010-08-10 2016-11-17 Ecole Polytechnique Federale De Lausanne Erythrocyte-binding therapeutics
BR112016019274A2 (en) * 2014-02-21 2017-10-10 Anokion Sa glyco-oriented therapeutic agents
US10946079B2 (en) 2014-02-21 2021-03-16 Ecole Polytechnique Federale De Lausanne Glycotargeting therapeutics
EP3638296A1 (en) 2017-06-16 2020-04-22 The University Of Chicago Compositions and methods for inducing immune tolerance
CA3099404A1 (en) * 2018-05-09 2019-11-14 The University Of Chicago Compositions and methods concerning immune tolerance

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20210244812A1 (en) * 2018-05-09 2021-08-12 The University Of Chicago Compositions and methods concerning immune tolerance
US20230069712A1 (en) * 2019-09-20 2023-03-02 Anokion Sa Compounds for the induction of antigen-specific immune tolerance
US20230115331A1 (en) * 2014-02-21 2023-04-13 École Polytechnique Fédérale De Lausanne (Epfl) Glycotargeting therapeutics
US11801305B2 (en) * 2014-02-21 2023-10-31 École Polytechnique Fédérale De Lausanne (Epfl) Glycotargeting therapeutics

Family Cites Families (251)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5742852A (en) 1980-08-27 1982-03-10 Seikagaku Kogyo Co Ltd Erythrocyte sensitized with antibody of polysaccharide of hemolytic streptococcus
CA1203164A (en) 1982-03-09 1986-04-15 Thomas J. Mckearn Antibody conjugates
US4867973A (en) 1984-08-31 1989-09-19 Cytogen Corporation Antibody-therapeutic agent conjugates
US5162512A (en) 1982-03-09 1992-11-10 Cytogen Corporation Amine derivatives of anthracycline antibodies
US5140104A (en) 1982-03-09 1992-08-18 Cytogen Corporation Amine derivatives of folic acid analogs
US4671958A (en) 1982-03-09 1987-06-09 Cytogen Corporation Antibody conjugates for the delivery of compounds to target sites
US4950738A (en) 1984-09-13 1990-08-21 Cytogen Corporation Amine derivatives of anthracycline antibiotics
US5156840A (en) 1982-03-09 1992-10-20 Cytogen Corporation Amine-containing porphyrin derivatives
US4741900A (en) 1982-11-16 1988-05-03 Cytogen Corporation Antibody-metal ion complexes
EP0119650A3 (en) 1983-03-21 1987-09-30 THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Galactosyl-insulin conjugates useful in treating diabetics
JPS59173762A (en) 1983-03-22 1984-10-01 Green Cross Corp:The Reagent for clotting reaction of red blood cell by reverse passive antibody
CA1260827A (en) 1984-08-31 1989-09-26 Richard C. Siegel Antibody-metal ion complexes
WO1986001720A1 (en) 1984-09-13 1986-03-27 Cytogen Corporation Antibody therapeutic agent conjugates
CA1330378C (en) 1986-05-08 1994-06-21 Daniel J. Coughlin Amine derivatives of folic acid analogs
US5086002A (en) 1987-09-07 1992-02-04 Agen Biomedical, Ltd. Erythrocyte agglutination assay
US20030022826A1 (en) 1987-09-08 2003-01-30 Duke University Use of synthetic peptides to induce tolerance to pathogenic T and B cell epitopes of autoantigens or infectious agents
US4859449A (en) 1987-09-14 1989-08-22 Center For Molecular Medicine And Immunology Modified antibodies for enhanced hepatocyte clearance
US5227293A (en) 1989-08-29 1993-07-13 The General Hospital Corporation Fusion proteins, their preparation and use
US5358857A (en) 1989-08-29 1994-10-25 The General Hospital Corp. Method of preparing fusion proteins
US5227165A (en) 1989-11-13 1993-07-13 Nova Pharmaceutical Corporation Liposphere delivery systems for local anesthetics
JP3032287B2 (en) 1989-12-11 2000-04-10 イムノメデイツクス・インコーポレイテツド Antibody targeting of diagnostic or therapeutic agents
JPH0436185A (en) 1990-03-28 1992-02-06 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co Ltd Fused antigen polypeptide
WO1992005801A1 (en) 1990-10-04 1992-04-16 University Of Virginia Alumni Patents Foundation Primate erythrocyte bound monoclonal antibody heteropolymers
KR950014915B1 (en) 1991-06-19 1995-12-18 주식회사녹십자 Asialoglycoprotein-conjugated compounds
GB9219562D0 (en) 1992-03-11 1992-10-28 Prendergast Kennet F Anti-viral peptides
WO1993018160A1 (en) 1992-03-11 1993-09-16 Kenneth Francis Prendergast Anti-viral fusion peptides
US6217869B1 (en) * 1992-06-09 2001-04-17 Neorx Corporation Pretargeting methods and compounds
GB9223084D0 (en) 1992-11-04 1992-12-16 Imp Cancer Res Tech Compounds to target cells
EP0602290B1 (en) 1992-12-04 1999-08-25 ConjuChem, Inc. Antibody-conjugated Hepatitis B surface antigen and use thereof
US6090925A (en) 1993-03-09 2000-07-18 Epic Therapeutics, Inc. Macromolecular microparticles and methods of production and use
EP0716703A1 (en) 1993-09-03 1996-06-19 PRENDERGAST, Kenneth, Francis Glycophorin binding protein (gbp130) fusion compositions
US6153203A (en) 1993-10-08 2000-11-28 Duotol Ab Immunological tolerance-inducing agent
US5681571A (en) 1993-10-08 1997-10-28 Duotol Ab Immunological tolerance-inducing agent
AU696964B2 (en) 1994-02-28 1998-09-24 University Of Virginia Patent Foundation Antigen-based heteropolymers and method for treating autoimmune diseases using the same
US5698679A (en) 1994-09-19 1997-12-16 National Jewish Center For Immunology And Respiratory Medicine Product and process for targeting an immune response
US5997861A (en) 1994-10-31 1999-12-07 Burstein Laboratories, Inc. Antiviral supramolecules containing target-binding molecules and therapeutic molecules bound to spectrin
US5718915A (en) 1994-10-31 1998-02-17 Burstein Laboratories, Inc. Antiviral liposome having coupled target-binding moiety and hydrolytic enzyme
US5886143A (en) 1994-12-07 1999-03-23 Neorx Corporation Hepatic-directed compounds and reagents for preparation thereof
EP0808366A1 (en) 1995-01-31 1997-11-26 The Rockefeller University IDENTIFICATION OF DEC, (DENTRITIC AND EPITHELIAL CELLS, 205 kDa), A RECEPTOR WITH C-TYPE LECTIN DOMAINS, NUCLEIC ACIDS ENCODING DEC, AND USES THEREOF
US20040258688A1 (en) 1995-01-31 2004-12-23 Daniel Hawiger Enhanced antigen delivery and modulation of the immune response therefrom
US20020187131A1 (en) 1995-01-31 2002-12-12 Daniel Hawiger Enhanced antigen delivery and modulation of the immune response therefrom
CA2223261C (en) 1995-06-07 2010-05-11 Immunomedics, Inc. Improved delivery of diagnostic and therapeutic agents to a target site
US6512103B1 (en) 1995-12-08 2003-01-28 Schering Corporation Mammalian chemokine reagents
US6060054A (en) 1996-04-10 2000-05-09 National Jewish Medical And Research Center Product for T lymphocyte immunosuppression
US6124128A (en) 1996-08-16 2000-09-26 The Regents Of The University Of California Long wavelength engineered fluorescent proteins
AU4571097A (en) 1996-10-09 1998-05-05 Takeda Chemical Industries Ltd. A method for producing a microparticle
US5994104A (en) 1996-11-08 1999-11-30 Royal Free Hospital School Of Medicine Interleukin-12 fusion protein
US20030103967A1 (en) 1997-01-07 2003-06-05 Habib Zaghouani Compounds, compositions and methods for the endocytic presentation of immunosuppressive factors
US20070218053A1 (en) 1997-01-07 2007-09-20 Habib Zaghouani Coupling of peripheral tolerance to endogenous il-10 promotes effective modulation of t cells and ameliorates autoimmune disease
US20020081298A1 (en) 1997-01-07 2002-06-27 Habib Zaghouani Compounds, compositions and methods for the endocytic presentation of immunosuppressive factors
US20090280132A1 (en) 1997-01-07 2009-11-12 Habib Zaghouani Coupling of peripheral tolerance to endogenous il-10 promotes effective modulation of t cells and ameliorates autoimmune disease
US6737057B1 (en) 1997-01-07 2004-05-18 The University Of Tennessee Research Corporation Compounds, compositions and methods for the endocytic presentation of immunosuppressive factors
US5948639A (en) 1997-04-10 1999-09-07 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. TGF-β pathway genes
EA199900947A1 (en) 1997-04-18 2000-04-24 Байоджен, Инк. HYBRID PROTEINS TGF-BETA II TYPE / CONSTANT AREA OF IMMUNOGLOBULIN
CU22737A1 (en) 1997-04-28 2002-02-28 Ct Ingenieria Genetica Biotech RECOMBINANT FUSION PROTEINS BASED ON BACTERIAL ADHESINS FOR THE DEVELOPMENT OF DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
US6120770A (en) 1997-09-12 2000-09-19 University Of Notre Dame Du Lac Plasmodium proteins useful for preparing vaccine compositions
US6953675B2 (en) 1997-11-06 2005-10-11 Immunomedics, Inc. Landscaped antibodies and antibody fragments for clinical use
US6703488B1 (en) 1998-01-15 2004-03-09 Center For Molecular Medicine And Immunology Antibody/receptor targeting moiety for enhanced delivery of armed ligand
CA2318284A1 (en) 1998-01-15 1999-07-22 Center For Molecular Medicine And Immunology Antibody/receptor targeting moiety for enhanced delivery of armed ligand
WO1999038536A1 (en) 1998-01-29 1999-08-05 Poly-Med Inc. Absorbable microparticles
US6562347B1 (en) 1998-03-12 2003-05-13 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Chemokine-tumor antigen fusion proteins as cancer vaccines
US6224794B1 (en) 1998-05-06 2001-05-01 Angiotech Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for microsphere production
WO1999059611A1 (en) 1998-05-21 1999-11-25 The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Compositions and methods for prevention and treatment of uncontrolled formation of intravascular fibrin clots
US7041287B2 (en) 1998-05-21 2006-05-09 Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Compositions and methods for selective dissolution of nascent intravascular blood clots
AU4572899A (en) 1998-06-16 2000-01-05 Biogen, Inc. Variant type ii tgf-beta receptor fusion proteins and methods
EP1093464A2 (en) 1998-07-06 2001-04-25 The University Of Tennessee Research Corporation Compounds, compositions and methods for the endocytic presentation of immunosuppressive factors
EP1117805A2 (en) 1998-10-07 2001-07-25 STRYKER CORPORATION (a Michigan corporation) Modified tgf-beta superfamily proteins
EP1046651A1 (en) 1999-04-19 2000-10-25 Koninklijke Universiteit Nijmegen Composition and method for modulating dendritic cell-T interaction
FR2794461B1 (en) 1999-06-07 2004-01-23 Lab Francais Du Fractionnement PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF NEW HUMAN IG FRACTIONS HAVING IMMUNOMODULATORY ACTIVITY
WO2001022995A1 (en) 1999-09-30 2001-04-05 Novo Nordisk A/S A method for preparing conjugates between an antigen and mucosal binding component
GB9923306D0 (en) 1999-10-01 1999-12-08 Isis Innovation Diagnostic and therapeutic epitope, and transgenic plant
EP1276849A4 (en) 2000-04-12 2004-06-09 Human Genome Sciences Inc Albumin fusion proteins
CA2416656A1 (en) 2000-06-05 2002-04-04 University Of Tennessee Corporation Compositions and methods for the endocytic presentation of immunosuppressive factors
CA2414272A1 (en) 2000-07-10 2002-01-17 Novartis Ag Bifunctional molecules and vectors complexed therewith for targeted gene delivery
US20020127241A1 (en) 2000-08-07 2002-09-12 Narum David L. Anti-plasmodium compositions and methods of use
GB0019302D0 (en) 2000-08-08 2000-09-27 Univ Nottingham Trent Biological materials and the use thereof for the treatment of disease
SE0003538D0 (en) 2000-09-29 2000-09-29 Isconova Ab New immunogenic complex
JP4070605B2 (en) 2000-10-19 2008-04-02 アイトゲノッシスシェ・テヒニッシュ・ホーホシューレ・ツューリヒ Block copolymers for multifunctional self-assembled systems
US7470420B2 (en) 2000-12-05 2008-12-30 The Regents Of The University Of California Optical determination of glucose utilizing boronic acid adducts
US7175988B2 (en) 2001-02-09 2007-02-13 Human Genome Sciences, Inc. Human G-protein Chemokine Receptor (CCR5) HDGNR10
NZ527977A (en) 2001-02-12 2005-10-28 Medarex Inc Human monoclonal antibodies to FC alpha receptor (CD89)
EP1241249A1 (en) 2001-03-12 2002-09-18 Gerold Schuler CD4+CD25+regulatory T cells from human blood
CN1327927C (en) 2001-04-10 2007-07-25 生物功效学股份有限公司 Cell separation compositions and methods
WO2002091146A2 (en) 2001-05-09 2002-11-14 Ecd Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for the prevention of unauthorized use and manipulation of digital content
GB0113798D0 (en) 2001-06-06 2001-07-25 Chiron Spa Antigens and vectors for vaccination
CA2489019A1 (en) 2001-06-15 2002-12-27 Nordic Vaccine Technology A/S Therapeutical vaccination
US7704964B2 (en) 2001-08-17 2010-04-27 Exothera L.L.C. Methods and compounds for the targeting of protein to exosomes
FR2829500B1 (en) 2001-09-13 2003-12-12 Hemosystem PROCESS FOR THE CONCENTRATION AND DETECTION OF PATHOGENIC SPROUTS FROM BLOOD PRODUCTS AND / OR DERIVATIVES THEREOF AND DEVICE FOR CARRYING OUT SAID METHOD
KR101159061B1 (en) 2001-10-22 2012-06-22 더 스크립스 리서치 인스티튜트 Antibody targeting compounds
US20050053579A1 (en) 2001-10-23 2005-03-10 Jacques Galipeau Novel synthetic chimeric fusion transgene with immuno-therapeutic uses
WO2003049684A2 (en) 2001-12-07 2003-06-19 Centocor, Inc. Pseudo-antibody constructs
GB0202399D0 (en) 2002-02-01 2002-03-20 Univ Bristol Peptide
WO2003066820A2 (en) 2002-02-05 2003-08-14 The Regents Of The University Of California Nucleic acid molecules encoding cd1-derived endosomal targeting proteins and uses thereof
GB0212885D0 (en) 2002-06-05 2002-07-17 Isis Innovation Therapeutic epitopes and uses thereof
ATE344316T1 (en) 2002-08-06 2006-11-15 Univ Loma Linda SUBSTANCES FOR THE PREVENTION AND TREATMENT OF AUTOIMMUNE DISEASES
US20040146948A1 (en) 2002-10-18 2004-07-29 Centenary Institute Of Cancer Medicine And Cell Biology Compositions and methods for targeting antigen-presenting cells with antibody single-chain variable region fragments
EP2292259A3 (en) 2002-11-15 2011-03-23 MUSC Foundation For Research Development Complement receptor 2 targeted complement modulators
AU2003300932A1 (en) 2002-12-16 2004-07-29 Wayne State University Bioactive peptides and unique ires elements from myelin proteolipid protein plp/dm20
WO2004091543A2 (en) 2003-03-04 2004-10-28 Alexion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Method of treating autoimmune disease by inducing antigen presentation by tolerance inducing antigen presenting cells
US20050281828A1 (en) 2003-03-04 2005-12-22 Bowdish Katherine S Method of treating autoimmune disease by inducing antigen presentation by tolerance inducing antigen presenting cells
AU2004234282B2 (en) 2003-04-28 2008-02-07 Sekisui Chemical Co., Ltd. Chaperonine-target protein complex, method of producing the same, method of stabilizing target protein, method of immobilizing target protein, method of analyzing the structure of target protein, sustained-release preparation and method of producing antibody against target protein
AU2003232751A1 (en) 2003-05-12 2004-11-26 Tolerogen, Ltd. Immunoglobulin conjugates of autoantigens and their use in the prevention of disease
US8007805B2 (en) 2003-08-08 2011-08-30 Paladin Labs, Inc. Chimeric antigens for breaking host tolerance to foreign antigens
US8198020B2 (en) 2003-08-22 2012-06-12 Potentia Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for enhancing phagocytosis or phagocyte activity
US20050100964A1 (en) 2003-11-11 2005-05-12 George Jackowski Diagnostic methods for congestive heart failure
WO2005051174A2 (en) 2003-11-21 2005-06-09 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Nucleic acid aptamer-based compositions and methods
US20110064754A1 (en) 2005-03-03 2011-03-17 Center For Molecular Medicine And Immunology Immunoconjugates Comprising Poxvirus-Derived Peptides and Antibodies Against Antigen-Presenting Cells for Subunit-Based Poxvirus Vaccines
FR2869323B1 (en) 2004-04-22 2006-07-21 Univ Reims Champagne Ardenne USE OF THE GENE ENCODING THE BETA CHAIN OF THE PROTEIN C4BP IN THE PRODUCTION OF RECOMBINANT DIMERIC PROTEINS
NZ550600A (en) 2004-04-28 2010-03-26 Btg Int Ltd Epitopes related to coeliac disease
JP2008504531A (en) 2004-06-24 2008-02-14 ザ スクリップス リサーチ インスティテュート Array with cleavable linker
US8273357B2 (en) 2004-07-16 2012-09-25 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Antigen-carbohydrate conjugates
FR2873925B1 (en) 2004-08-05 2006-10-13 Erytech Pharma Soc Par Actions METHOD AND DEVICE FOR LYSE-RESCALING FOR THE INCORPORATION OF ACTIVE PRINCIPLE, IN PARTICULAR ASPARAGINASE OR INOSITOL HEXAPHOSPHATE, IN ERYTHROCYTES
TW200616604A (en) * 2004-08-26 2006-06-01 Nicholas Piramal India Ltd Nitric oxide releasing prodrugs containing bio-cleavable linker
US8617819B2 (en) 2004-09-17 2013-12-31 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Polymers for analyte detection
WO2006081631A1 (en) 2005-02-07 2006-08-10 Lipotek Pty Ltd Adjuvanting material
EP3332808B1 (en) 2005-03-03 2020-09-09 Immunomedics Inc. Humanized l243 antibodies
FR2884717B1 (en) 2005-04-25 2009-07-03 Erytech Pharma Soc Par Actions ERYTHROCYTES CONTAINING ARGININE DEIMINASE
US9505867B2 (en) 2005-05-31 2016-11-29 Ecole Polytechmique Fédérale De Lausanne Triblock copolymers for cytoplasmic delivery of gene-based drugs
US7811809B2 (en) 2005-06-15 2010-10-12 Saint Louis University Molecular biosensors for use in competition assays
MX2008000253A (en) 2005-07-08 2008-04-02 Biogen Idec Inc Sp35 antibodies and uses thereof.
FI20050814A0 (en) 2005-08-11 2005-08-11 Procollagen Oy Procedure for observing autoantibodies formed in rheumatoid arthritis
US20090130104A1 (en) 2005-10-05 2009-05-21 The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Fusion proteins for inhibition and dissolution of coagulation
WO2007061936A2 (en) 2005-11-18 2007-05-31 New England Medical Center Hospitals, Inc. Clearance of abnormal iga1 in iga1 deposition diseases
WO2007097934A2 (en) 2006-02-17 2007-08-30 Elusys Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and compositions for using erythrocytes as carriers for delivery of drugs
US8021689B2 (en) 2006-02-21 2011-09-20 Ecole Polytechnique Federale de Lausanne (“EPFL”) Nanoparticles for immunotherapy
US20080305104A1 (en) 2006-02-24 2008-12-11 Young David S F Cytotoxicity mediation of cells evidencing surface expression of TROP-2
US20080131428A1 (en) 2006-02-24 2008-06-05 Arius Research, Inc. Cytotoxicity mediation of cells evidencing surface expression of TROP-2
US20080213267A1 (en) 2006-02-24 2008-09-04 Arius Research, Inc. Cytotoxicity mediation of cells evidencing surface expression of TROP-2
US7420040B2 (en) 2006-02-24 2008-09-02 Arius Research Inc. Cytotoxicity mediation of cells evidencing surface expression of TROP-2
WO2007099387A1 (en) 2006-03-03 2007-09-07 Mymetics Corporation Virosome-like vesicles comprising gp41-derived antigens
ZA200808289B (en) 2006-03-09 2010-02-24 Aplagen Gmbh Modified molecules which promote hematopoiesis
MX2008011389A (en) 2006-03-09 2009-01-26 Aplagen Gmbh Modified molecules which promote hematopoiesis.
WO2007130873A2 (en) 2006-04-28 2007-11-15 Regents Of The University Of Minnesota Liver-specific nanocapsules and methods of using
CA2690973A1 (en) 2006-06-23 2007-12-27 Paul M. Simon Targeted immune conjugates
EP2077821B1 (en) 2006-10-12 2019-08-14 The University Of Queensland Compositions and methods for modulating immune responses
US8920808B2 (en) 2006-10-31 2014-12-30 East Carolina University Cytokine-based fusion proteins for treatment of multiple sclerosis
CA2667802A1 (en) 2006-11-03 2008-05-29 Northwestern University Multiple sclerosis therapy
US9457047B2 (en) 2006-11-06 2016-10-04 Whitehead Institute Immunomodulating compositions and methods of use thereof
WO2008057501A2 (en) 2006-11-06 2008-05-15 Whitehead Institute Immunomodulating compositions and methods of use thereof
EP1938836A1 (en) 2006-12-28 2008-07-02 Universite Rene Descartes (Paris V) Compositions comprising a B subunit of shiga toxin and a means stimulating NKT cells
TWI422594B (en) 2007-02-02 2014-01-11 Baylor Res Inst Agents that engage antigen-presenting cells through dendritic cell asialoglycoprotein receptor (dc-asgpr)
MX2009008143A (en) 2007-02-02 2009-10-20 Baylor Res Inst Multivariable antigens complexed with targeting humanized monoclonal antibody.
NZ593450A (en) 2007-02-02 2012-08-31 Baylor Res Inst Vaccines based on targeting antigen to dcir expressed on antigen-presenting cells
TW200846363A (en) 2007-03-22 2008-12-01 Urrma R & B Novel human anti-R7V antibodies and uses thereof
DK2769984T3 (en) 2007-05-11 2017-10-16 Altor Bioscience Corp Fusion molecules and IL-15 variants
US8889140B2 (en) 2007-05-31 2014-11-18 Transtarget, Inc. Compositions and methods for tissue repair
US7507539B2 (en) 2007-07-30 2009-03-24 Quest Diagnostics Investments Incorporated Substractive single label comparative hybridization
CA2695385A1 (en) 2007-07-31 2009-02-05 Atul Bedi Polypeptide-nucleic acid conjugate for immunoprophylaxis or immunotherapy for neoplastic or infectious disorders
FR2919804B1 (en) 2007-08-08 2010-08-27 Erytech Pharma COMPOSITION AND ANTI-TUMOR THERAPEUTIC VACCINE
AU2008290217B2 (en) 2007-08-20 2013-09-05 Protalix Ltd. Saccharide-containing protein conjugates and uses thereof
US10736848B2 (en) 2007-10-12 2020-08-11 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Vaccine nanotechnology
EP2057998A1 (en) 2007-10-31 2009-05-13 Universitätsklinikum Hamburg-Eppendorf Use of modified cells for the treatment of multiple sclerosis
US9260692B2 (en) 2007-10-31 2016-02-16 Universitat Zurich Use of modified cells for the treatment of multiple sclerosis
CA2708942A1 (en) 2007-12-19 2009-06-25 Mivac Development Aktiebolag Compositions and methods for treatment of autoimmune and allergic diseases
FR2925339B1 (en) 2007-12-24 2010-03-05 Erytech Pharma DRUG FOR THE TREATMENT OF PANCREATIC CANCER
US8333973B2 (en) 2008-01-02 2012-12-18 The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Targeting recombinant therapeutics to circulating red blood cells
EP2242507B1 (en) 2008-02-13 2013-02-20 Erytech Pharma Formulation and method for the prevention and treatment of skeletal manifestation of gaucher's disease
FR2928270B1 (en) 2008-03-10 2011-01-21 Erytech Pharma FORMULATION METHOD FOR THE PREVENTION OR TREATMENT OF BONE METASTASES AND OTHER BONE DISEASES
KR101819852B1 (en) 2008-03-28 2018-02-28 엠디엔에이 라이프 사이언시즈 인코퍼레이티드 Aberrant mitochondrial dna, associated fusion transcripts and hybridization probes therefor
AU2009228217A1 (en) 2008-03-28 2009-10-01 The Regents Of The University Of California Polypeptide-polymer conjugates and methods of use thereof
EP2283358B1 (en) 2008-04-29 2015-04-22 Immunexcite, Inc. Immunomodulating compositions and methods of use thereof
US8852640B2 (en) 2008-07-03 2014-10-07 Ecole Polytechnique Federale De Lausanne (Epfl) Micelles for delivery of nitric oxide
DK2982695T3 (en) 2008-07-09 2019-05-13 Biogen Ma Inc COMPOSITIONS CONCERNING ANTIBODIES AGAINST LINGO OR FRAGMENTS THEREOF
AU2010222929B2 (en) 2008-07-16 2013-07-25 Baylor Research Institute Antigen presenting cell targeted anti-viral vaccines
US8323696B2 (en) 2008-08-29 2012-12-04 Ecole Polytechnique Federale De Lausanne Nanoparticles for immunotherapy
US8277812B2 (en) 2008-10-12 2012-10-02 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Immunonanotherapeutics that provide IgG humoral response without T-cell antigen
US8343497B2 (en) 2008-10-12 2013-01-01 The Brigham And Women's Hospital, Inc. Targeting of antigen presenting cells with immunonanotherapeutics
US8343498B2 (en) 2008-10-12 2013-01-01 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Adjuvant incorporation in immunonanotherapeutics
US8591905B2 (en) 2008-10-12 2013-11-26 The Brigham And Women's Hospital, Inc. Nicotine immunonanotherapeutics
CN101750244B (en) 2008-10-13 2014-03-12 艾博生物医药(杭州)有限公司 Method for separating red cells from blood sample and application
WO2010045518A1 (en) 2008-10-16 2010-04-22 The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Compositions containing thrombomodulin domains and uses thereof
FR2938332B1 (en) 2008-11-07 2011-11-25 Erytech Pharma PREDICTIVE TEST FOR NEUTRALIZATION OF ASPARAGINASE ACTIVITY
US8268977B2 (en) 2008-11-20 2012-09-18 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Strongly quenching oligomeric excimer/quencher pairs for detection schemes
DK2367561T3 (en) 2008-11-30 2015-08-24 Immusant Inc Configurations and methods for treatment of celiac
FR2940087B1 (en) 2008-12-18 2011-05-06 Lab Francais Du Fractionnement ERYTHROCYTES CONTAINING FACTOR VIII, PREPARATION AND USES.
AU2010206854A1 (en) 2009-01-20 2011-08-04 Myelin Repair Foundation, Inc. Compositions and methods for induction of antigen-specific tolerance
DK2406289T3 (en) 2009-03-10 2017-05-01 Baylor Res Inst ANTIGEN PRESENTING CELL TARGETED ANTIVIRUS VACCINES
US9562104B2 (en) 2009-03-10 2017-02-07 Baylor Research Institute Anti-CD40 antibodies
WO2010107658A2 (en) 2009-03-16 2010-09-23 Vallera Daniel A Methods and compositions for bi-specific targeting of cd19/cd22
FR2944106B1 (en) 2009-04-03 2012-09-28 Erytech Pharma METHOD OF DETERMINING INOSITOL HEXAPHOSPHATE (IHP).
LT2459220T (en) 2009-07-31 2020-12-28 Ascendis Pharma A/S Biodegradable polyethylene glycol based water-insoluble hydrogels
WO2011026122A2 (en) 2009-08-31 2011-03-03 Amplimmune, Inc. B7-h4 fusion proteins and methods of use thereof
US8734786B2 (en) 2009-09-16 2014-05-27 Northwestern University Use of ECDI-fixed cell tolerance as a method for preventing allograft rejection
GB0916749D0 (en) 2009-09-23 2009-11-04 Mologic Ltd Peptide cleaning agents
US20110091493A1 (en) 2009-10-16 2011-04-21 Northwestern University Vaccine compositions and uses thereof
EP2493487B1 (en) 2009-10-27 2016-08-24 Erytech Pharma Composition to induce specific immune tolerance
WO2011072290A2 (en) 2009-12-11 2011-06-16 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Targeted dendrimer-drug conjugates
CN102791293A (en) 2010-01-14 2012-11-21 葛兰素集团有限公司 Liver targeting molecules
US9096655B2 (en) 2010-01-27 2015-08-04 Tata Memorial Centre Method for in-vivo binding of chromatin fragments
US8592364B2 (en) 2010-02-11 2013-11-26 Ecole Polytechnique Federale de Lausanne (“EPFL”) CCR7 ligand delivery and co-delivery in immunotherapy
WO2011112482A2 (en) 2010-03-08 2011-09-15 University Of Utah Research Foundation Polymeric drug delivery conjugates and methods of making and using thereof
IT1399590B1 (en) 2010-04-26 2013-04-26 Erydel Spa APPARATUS AND KIT FOR ENCAPSING AT LEAST A COMPOUND FOR THERAPEUTIC AND / OR DIAGNOSTIC USE WITHIN ERYTHROCYTES
CN103153927B (en) 2010-04-27 2017-02-15 西纳福克斯股份有限公司 Fused cyclooctyne compounds and their use in metal-free click reactions
EP2563396A2 (en) 2010-04-30 2013-03-06 Augmenta Biologicals LLC Delivery proteins
WO2011154887A1 (en) 2010-06-07 2011-12-15 Assistance Publique - Hopitaux De Paris Mellitin for the use thereof in the treatment of parkinson's disease
US9326939B2 (en) 2010-07-31 2016-05-03 The Scripps Research Institute Liposome targeting compounds and related uses
WO2012018380A2 (en) 2010-07-31 2012-02-09 The Scripps Research Institute Compositions and methods for inducing immune tolerance
AU2011289579B2 (en) 2010-08-10 2016-11-17 Ecole Polytechnique Federale De Lausanne Erythrocyte-binding therapeutics
US9850296B2 (en) 2010-08-10 2017-12-26 Ecole Polytechnique Federale De Lausanne (Epfl) Erythrocyte-binding therapeutics
US9517257B2 (en) 2010-08-10 2016-12-13 Ecole Polytechnique Federale De Lausanne (Epfl) Erythrocyte-binding therapeutics
US9175280B2 (en) 2010-10-12 2015-11-03 Sangamo Biosciences, Inc. Methods and compositions for treating hemophilia B
US20120121592A1 (en) 2010-10-13 2012-05-17 Baylor Research Institute Targeting Antigens to Human Dendritic Cells Via DC-Asialoglycoprotein Receptor to Produce IL-10 Regulatory T-Cells
SE535625C2 (en) 2010-10-28 2012-10-16 Toleranzia Ab New compositions and procedures for the treatment of autoimmune and allergic diseases
US8501930B2 (en) 2010-12-17 2013-08-06 Arrowhead Madison Inc. Peptide-based in vivo siRNA delivery system
WO2012112690A2 (en) 2011-02-16 2012-08-23 Fabius Biotechnology Targeting of therapeutic drugs and diagnostic agents employing collagen binding domains
JP6460789B2 (en) 2011-06-03 2019-01-30 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Heterobifunctional linker having polyethylene glycol segment and immune response modulating complex prepared from the linker
EP2811831B1 (en) 2012-02-07 2018-04-11 The Regents Of The University Of California Glycosphingolipids for use in modulating immune responses
CN110075283A (en) 2012-02-15 2019-08-02 洛桑聚合联合学院 Erythrocyte binding therapeutic agent
US9751945B2 (en) 2012-04-13 2017-09-05 Whitehead Institute For Biomedical Research Sortase-modified VHH domains and uses thereof
WO2013160865A1 (en) 2012-04-26 2013-10-31 Toleranzia Ab Immunotolerizing fusion proteins for treatment of multiple sclerosis
WO2014011465A2 (en) 2012-07-13 2014-01-16 Albert Einstein College Of Medicine Of Yeshiva University Aptamer-targeted antigen delivery
JP2015525792A (en) 2012-08-09 2015-09-07 ロシュ グリクアート アクチェンゲゼルシャフト ASGPR antibody and use thereof
US10548957B2 (en) 2012-09-28 2020-02-04 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Inc. Targeted expansion of Qa-1-peptide-specific regulatory CD8 T cells to ameliorate arthritis
US9371352B2 (en) 2013-02-08 2016-06-21 Vaccinex, Inc. Modified glycolipids and methods of making and using the same
WO2014135528A1 (en) 2013-03-04 2014-09-12 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) Fusion proteins and immunoconjugates and uses thereof
BR112015026019A2 (en) 2013-04-11 2017-07-25 Brigham & Womens Hospital Inc methods and compositions for treating autoimmune diseases
EP2989123A4 (en) 2013-04-22 2016-10-12 Scripps Research Inst Methods and compositions for treating bleeding disorders
US10946079B2 (en) 2014-02-21 2021-03-16 Ecole Polytechnique Federale De Lausanne Glycotargeting therapeutics
BR112016019274A2 (en) * 2014-02-21 2017-10-10 Anokion Sa glyco-oriented therapeutic agents
EP3125927B1 (en) 2014-04-01 2021-01-27 Rubius Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and compositions for immunomodulation
WO2015157595A1 (en) 2014-04-11 2015-10-15 Medimmune, Llc Conjugated compounds comprising cysteine-engineered antibodies
CA2948165A1 (en) 2014-05-08 2015-11-12 The Henry M. Jackson Foundation For The Advancement Of Military Medicine, Inc. Using b-cell-targeting antigen igg fusion as tolerogenic protein therapy for treating adverse immune responses
US10993990B2 (en) 2014-05-16 2021-05-04 Baylor Research Institute Methods and compositions for treating autoimmune and inflammatory conditions
EP4321171A2 (en) 2014-08-08 2024-02-14 The Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University Sirp alpha-antibody fusion proteins
US20160060358A1 (en) 2014-08-28 2016-03-03 California Institute Of Technology Induction of antigen-specific tolerance
BR122023020827A2 (en) 2014-09-17 2024-01-23 Spogen Biotech Inc. PLANT SEED COATED WITH AN ENZYME THAT CATALYZES THE PRODUCTION OF NITRIC OXIDE
MA40861A (en) 2014-10-31 2017-09-05 Biogen Ma Inc ANTI-GLYCOPROTEIN IIB / IIIA ANTIBODIES
US20180117171A1 (en) 2015-04-01 2018-05-03 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Immunoconjugates for programming or reprogramming of cells
WO2016183361A1 (en) 2015-05-13 2016-11-17 Advaxis, Inc. Immunogenic listeria-based compositions comprising truncated acta-antigen fusions and methods of use thereof
JP2018518972A (en) 2015-06-26 2018-07-19 ユニバーシティ オブ サザン カリフォルニア Masking chimeric antigen receptor T cells for tumor specific activation
WO2017015141A1 (en) 2015-07-17 2017-01-26 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Humanized anti-glycophorin a antibodies and uses thereof
AU2016303497A1 (en) 2015-07-31 2018-03-01 Tarveda Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for immuno-oncology therapies
WO2017025889A1 (en) 2015-08-13 2017-02-16 Pfizer Inc. Polymeric nanoparticles with dec-205 ligand and co-encapsulating an antigen subject to an autoimmune response and a glucocorticoid receptor agonist
CA2997442C (en) 2015-09-04 2021-01-26 Yale University Polymeric bile acid nanocompositions targeting the pancreas and colon
US10294294B2 (en) 2015-09-10 2019-05-21 Albert Einstein College Of Medicine Synthetic antibodies to BAX and uses thereof
EP3349784A1 (en) 2015-09-19 2018-07-25 Ecole Polytechnique Fédérale de Lausanne Glycotargeting therapeutics
EP3356371A4 (en) 2015-09-29 2020-06-24 The University of Chicago Polymer conjugate vaccines
US10688175B2 (en) 2015-10-13 2020-06-23 Daniel C. Carter NSP10 self-assembling fusion proteins for vaccines, therapeutics, diagnostics and other nanomaterial applications
EP3701963A1 (en) 2015-12-22 2020-09-02 CureVac AG Method for producing rna molecule compositions
CA3008892A1 (en) 2015-12-23 2017-06-29 Cour Pharmaceuticals Development Company Inc. Covalent polymer-antigen conjugated particles
WO2017139498A1 (en) 2016-02-09 2017-08-17 Cour Pharmaceuticals Development Company Inc. Timps encapsulating japanese cedar pollen epitopes
CA3014064A1 (en) 2016-02-12 2017-08-17 Bloodworks Therapeutic induction of tolerance using recombinant cell surface antigens
WO2017155981A1 (en) 2016-03-07 2017-09-14 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Protein-chaperoned t-cell vaccines
CN109475577A (en) 2016-05-03 2019-03-15 Sqz生物技术公司 Intracellular delivery biomolecule is with inducing tolerance
CA3023092A1 (en) 2016-05-03 2017-11-09 Sqz Biotechnologies Company Intracellular delivery of biomolecules to induce tolerance
US20170326213A1 (en) 2016-05-16 2017-11-16 Augusta University Research Institute, Inc. Protein-Coupled Red Blood Cell Compositions and Methods of Their Use
JP6687498B2 (en) 2016-10-25 2020-04-22 住友ナコ フォ−クリフト株式会社 Mounting bracket for camera
EP3638296A1 (en) 2017-06-16 2020-04-22 The University Of Chicago Compositions and methods for inducing immune tolerance
CN111655732B (en) 2017-11-14 2023-09-12 Gc细胞治疗 anti-HER 2 antibodies or antigen binding fragments thereof and chimeric antigen receptors comprising same
US20210171642A1 (en) 2018-03-26 2021-06-10 The University Of Chicago Methods and compositions for targeting liver and lymph node sinusoidal endothelial cell c-type lectin (lsectin)
WO2019215590A1 (en) 2018-05-07 2019-11-14 Anokion Sa Glycophorin a antigen-binding proteins

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20230115331A1 (en) * 2014-02-21 2023-04-13 École Polytechnique Fédérale De Lausanne (Epfl) Glycotargeting therapeutics
US11801305B2 (en) * 2014-02-21 2023-10-31 École Polytechnique Fédérale De Lausanne (Epfl) Glycotargeting therapeutics
US20210244812A1 (en) * 2018-05-09 2021-08-12 The University Of Chicago Compositions and methods concerning immune tolerance
US20230069712A1 (en) * 2019-09-20 2023-03-02 Anokion Sa Compounds for the induction of antigen-specific immune tolerance

Non-Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Ashwell et al., Ann. Rev. Biochem. 51:531-554 (1982) (Year: 1982) *
G-Biosciences, Double-Do™ Protein Cross-Linkers, Handbook & Selection Guide, available online at https://wolfson.huji.ac.il/purification/PDF/ProteinInteractions/GBIOSC_ProtCrossLinkersHandbook.pdf, 16 pages (first available 2011) (Year: 2011) *
NCBI Database, GenBank Accession No. M74826, 2 pages (1994) (Year: 1994) *
Robert et al., Diabetes 63:2876-2887 (2014) (Year: 2014) *
Roth et al., Macromol. Rapid Commun. 32:1123-1143 (2011) (Year: 2011) *
Stenzel, ACS Macro Lett. 2:14-18 (2013) (Year: 2013) *
Zhou et al., Human Vaccines & Immunother. 16:240-250 (2020) (Year: 2020) *

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11793882B2 (en) 2014-02-21 2023-10-24 École Polytechnique Fédérale De Lausanne (Epfl) Glycotargeting therapeutics
US11801305B2 (en) 2014-02-21 2023-10-31 École Polytechnique Fédérale De Lausanne (Epfl) Glycotargeting therapeutics

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20160243248A1 (en) 2016-08-25
US11654188B2 (en) 2023-05-23
US20170296636A9 (en) 2017-10-19
US10946079B2 (en) 2021-03-16
US20200129601A1 (en) 2020-04-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11666638B2 (en) Glycotargeting therapeutics
US20230093483A1 (en) Glycotargeting therapeutics
US20230115331A1 (en) Glycotargeting therapeutics
JP7434248B2 (en) Sugar targeting therapeutic agent
US11801305B2 (en) Glycotargeting therapeutics
EA044172B1 (en) THERAPEUTICS WITH CARBOHYDRATE-MEDIATED TARGETED DELIVERY

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

AS Assignment

Owner name: ECOLE POLYTECHNIQUE FEDERALE DE LAUSANNE (EPFL), SWITZERLAND

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:HUBBELL, JEFFREY A.;WILSON, DAVID SCOTT;SIGNING DATES FROM 20160127 TO 20160210;REEL/FRAME:065347/0534

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED